WO2016110702A1 - Treatment of mycobacterial infection - Google Patents

Treatment of mycobacterial infection Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016110702A1
WO2016110702A1 PCT/GB2016/050029 GB2016050029W WO2016110702A1 WO 2016110702 A1 WO2016110702 A1 WO 2016110702A1 GB 2016050029 W GB2016050029 W GB 2016050029W WO 2016110702 A1 WO2016110702 A1 WO 2016110702A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
pharmaceutically acceptable
inhibitor
serca
antagonist
acceptable salt
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/GB2016/050029
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Frances Mary Platt
Nick PLATT
Paul FINERAN
Edith Sim
Emyr Lloyd-Evans
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Oxford University Innovation Ltd
Original Assignee
Oxford University Innovation Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oxford University Innovation Ltd filed Critical Oxford University Innovation Ltd
Priority to US15/541,809 priority Critical patent/US20180125796A1/en
Publication of WO2016110702A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016110702A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/12Ketones
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/34Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having five-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. isosorbide
    • A61K31/343Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having five-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. isosorbide condensed with a carbocyclic ring, e.g. coumaran, bufuralol, befunolol, clobenfurol, amiodarone
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/365Lactones
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A61K31/4025Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings, e.g. cromakalim
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A61K31/407Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil condensed with other heterocyclic ring systems, e.g. ketorolac, physostigmine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/445Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04Antibacterial agents
    • A61P31/06Antibacterial agents for tuberculosis

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium, and in particular to the treatment of tuberculosis.
  • Mtb Mycobacterium tuberculosis
  • TB the causative agent of human tuberculosis
  • BCG Bacillus Calmette-Guerin
  • Mtb and the model organism BCG have the unusual ability to invade, persist and replicate within cells of the innate immune system, particularly alveolar macrophages (Russell, D. G., Cardona, P. J., Kim, M. J., Allain, S. & Altare, F. Foamy macrophages and the progression of the human tuberculosis granuloma. Nat Immunol 10, 943-948, doi: 10.1038/ni. l781; 2009). 3 ⁇ 4-infected cells develop a characteristic cholesterol-laden foamy cell phenotype (Peyron, P. et al.
  • Foamy macrophages from tuberculous patients' granulomas constitute a nutrient-rich reservoir for M. tuberculosis persistence.
  • Non-pathogenic mycobacteria including Mycobacterium smegmatis, bind host cell-surface receptors and are ingested into phagosomes that subsequently mature and fuse with lysosomes, leading to destruction of the mycobacterium.
  • pathogenic mycobacteria are not delivered to the lysosome due to the mycobacterium inhibiting phagosome-lysosome fusion.
  • Multiple mechanisms have been proposed to explain this, including phagosome maturation arrest (Jayachandran, R. et al. Survival of mycobacteria in macrophages is mediated by coronin 1 -dependent activation of calcineurin. Cell 130, 37-50, doi: 10.1016/j .cell.2007.04.043; 2007), defective acidification (Sturgill-Koszycki, S. et al. Lack of acidification in Mycobacterium phagosomes produced by exclusion of the vesicular proton- ATPase.
  • NPC Niemann-Pick type C
  • NPCl 95% of clinical cases
  • NPC 2 Vanier, M. T. Niemann-Pick disease type C. Orphanet J Rare Dis 5, 16, doi: 10.1186/1750-1172-5-16; 2010
  • NPCl encodes NPCl, a multi- membrane-spanning protein that resides in of the limiting LE/Lys membrane (Davies, J. P., Chen, F. W. & Vietnamesenou, Y. A. Transmembrane molecular pump activity of Niemann-Pick CI protein. Science 290, 2295-2298, doi: 10.1126/science.290.5500.2295 290/5500/2295 [pii]; 2000).
  • NPC2 is a soluble lysosomal cholesterol-binding protein
  • NPC cells also accumulate autophagic vacuoles due to a failure in their clearance (Pacheco, C. D., Kunkel, R. & Lieberman, A. P. Autophagy in Niemann-Pick C disease is dependent upon Beclin-1 and responsive to lipid trafficking defects.
  • the observations outlined above prompted the inventors to investigate whether there is a mechanistic link between pathogenic mycobacterial infection and the NPC pathway.
  • the inventors unexpectedly found that pathogenic mycobacteria, including Mycobacterium tuberculosis, secrete lipids that inhibit the NPC pathway, promoting the intra-cellular survival of the mycobacteria in host macrophages.
  • This link between the rare lysosomal storage disorder NPC and Mtb infection has important implications for understanding host-pathogen interactions and for developing new therapies to combat TB, particularly in the current era of antibiotic resistance.
  • treatment with a particular class of pharmacological agent that corrects defects in NPCl mutant cells promotes mycobacterial clearance.
  • SERCA antagonists which inhibit Ca 2+ uptake by the sarco-endoplasmic reticulum Ca 2+ -ATPase (SERCA), causing Ca 2+ to leak from the endoplasmic reticulum and cytosolic [Ca 2+ ] to increase, were found to significantly lower bacterial load.
  • Other classes of agent known to be useful against NPC disease did not promote mycobacterial clearance.
  • miglustat which is an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid (GSL) biosynthesis that is clinically approved for treating NPC disease, did not by itself enhance mycobacterial clearance over the time course tested.
  • ⁇ -cyclodextrin which ameliorates NPC disease symptoms in animal models, possibly via stimulation of exocytosis, was found not to promote mycobacterial clearance.
  • a structural analog of curcumin that does not function as SERCA antagonist was found not to promote clearance of the mycobacterium.
  • the present invention provides a combination comprising a SERCA antagonist and an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, which combination is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
  • the active compounds in the combination i.e. the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, may be administered together in the same pharmaceutical composition or in different compositions intended for separate,
  • the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis are both present in the same pharmaceutical composition.
  • the combination of the invention may comprise a pharmaceutical composition comprising the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
  • composition may further comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluents.
  • the invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a SERCA antagonist, an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, and a
  • composition is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
  • the invention also provides a SERCA antagonist, which SERCA antagonist is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
  • the invention also provides an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, which inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co- administration with a SERCA antagonist.
  • the invention also provides a method of treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium, which method comprises administering to a human or animal patient in need of such treatment an effective amount of a SERCA antagonist and an effective amount of an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
  • the active compounds employed in the method of the invention i.e. the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, may be administered together in the same pharmaceutical composition. Alternatively, they may be administered in different compositions, and the different compositions may be administered separately, simultaneously, concomitantly or sequentially, and by the same route or by a different route.
  • the invention also provides a kit of parts comprising a SERCA antagonist together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
  • the invention also provides a kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of
  • glycosphingolipid biosynthesis together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with a SERCA antagonist, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
  • the invention also provides a kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of
  • glycosphingolipid biosynthesis a SERCA antagonist
  • said patient is human.
  • Figure 1 A is a histogram showing that BCG infected macrophages exhibited elevated sphingosine levels relative to uninfected cells 48 hours post-infection.
  • Figure IB presents graphs which show that a 24-hour infection with BCG was associated with a reduction in GPN-induced Ca 2+ release, whereas infection with nonpathogenic Mycobacterium smegmatis (M smegmatis) was not.
  • Figure 1C presents a histogram and micrographs showing the results of direct measurement of endo-lysosomal Ca 2+ content with a luminal Ca 2+ -dye (low-affinity Rhod- dextran), and confirming the reduced levels of lysosomal Ca 2+ in BCG-infected RAW cells.
  • Figure ID is a histogram demonstrating the elevated GSL NPC phenotype: total GSL levels were significantly elevated by 48 hours.
  • Figure 2A is a histogram showing that, accumulation of lactosylceramide (LacCer), which occurs in NPC cells and in tissues of Npcl '1' mice was not detected at 24 and 48 hours post-infection (BCG-infected RAW 264.7 cells) but was significantly elevated 7 days post-infection.
  • LacCer lactosylceramide
  • Figure 2B contains micrographs showing cholesterol accumulation in punctate structures in BCG infected RAW 264.7 cells, but not in cells infected with non-pathogenic M. Smegmatis.
  • Figure 2C is a histogram of the results of biochemical quantitation of cholesterol in control and BCG-infected cells, showing the higher cholesterol level in BCG-infected cells.
  • Figure 3 A contains micrographs showing that the following hallmarks of NPC were induced by BCG infection but not by M smegmatis: the storage and mislocalisation (altered trafficking) of GM1 ganglioside (Fig. 3 Ai) and sphingomyelin respectively (Fig. 3Aii).
  • Figure 3B presents a histogram showing statistically significant elevation of GSLs in 3 ⁇ 4-infected cells together with representative FIPLC traces.
  • Figure 3C is a histogram showing increased levels of sphingosine in monocyte-derived macrophages from healthy donors infected with BCG compared to controls.
  • Figure 3D is a histogram showing reduced LE/Lys Ca 2+ levels (indirectly assayed by GPN-evoked Ca 2+ release) in monocyte-derived macrophages from healthy donors infected with BCG compared to controls.
  • Figure 4A is a histogram showing elevated GSL levels in monocyte-derived macrophages from healthy donors infected with BCG compared to controls.
  • Figure 4B presents micrographs showing the detection of cholesterol storage in the LE/Lys in BCG-infected human macrophages (and in non-infected neighbouring cells) (Fig. 4Bi), accompanied by mi straffi eking of GM1 ganglioside (Fig. 4Bii). Significant expansion of the lysosomal compartment was also detected, another hallmark of NPC (Fig. 4Biii). None of these changes occurred when human macrophages were infected with nonpathogenic M. smegmatis (Fig 4Bi-iii).
  • Figure 5 A presents micrographs showing that chloroform: methanol-extracted BCG lipids induced accumulation/re-distribution of cholesterol (Fig 5Ai), mistrafficking of GM1 ganglioside (Fig 5Aii) and accumulation/re-distribution of sphingomyelin (Fig 5Aiii) in uninfected RAW 264.7 macrophages, comparable to the NPC phenotypes induced by live mycobacteria.
  • Figure 5B presents micrographs showing that a heat-treated preparation of the chloroform: methanol-extracted BCG lipids had the same ability to affect GM1 ganglioside distribution as the non-heat-treated fraction, suggesting that the NPC phenotype-inducing agent was a lipid and not proteinaceous.
  • Figure 5C presents micrographs showing that M3 ⁇ 4-derived my colic acids (the major cell wall-derived class of lipids m Mtb) induced storage of cholesterol and sphingomyelin in RAW 246.7 macrophages (Fig. 5Ci and ii).
  • Figure 6 A presents micrographs showing thatM3 ⁇ 4-derived my colic acids induced cholesterol storage and GM1 mistrafficking in primary human macrophages.
  • Figure 6B is a histogram showing that, oiMtb derived trehalose dimycolate (TDM), trehalose monomycolate (TMM) and glucose monomycolate (GMM), TDM gave the greatest increase in Lysotracker fluorescence, indicative of NPC-like lysosomal expansion/storage, whereas GMM and TMM caused only modest lysosomal expansion that did not reach statistical significance, and GMM from non-pathogenic M. smegmatis had minimal effect.
  • TDM oiMtb derived trehalose dimycolate
  • TMM trehalose monomycolate
  • GMM glucose monomycolate
  • Figure 7 presents histograms, which show that, in addition to affecting lysosomal morphology, TDM from bovis also recapitulated NPC phenotypes in terms of reduced LE/Lys Ca 2+ levels.
  • Figure 8 presents micrographs showing that TDM from bovis also recapitulated NPC phenotypes in terms of cholesterol storage (Fig. 8i) and GM1 mistrafficking (Fig. 8ii).
  • Figure 9 is a histogram showing that TDM fromM bovis also recapitulated NPC phenotypes in terms of GSL accumulation.
  • Figure 1 OA is a histogram showing that bone marrow-derived macrophages with 50% of wild-type NPC1 protein levels (heterozygous NPC1 cells) were more susceptible to inhibition by TDM than wild-type cells.
  • Figure 10B presents micrographs demonstrating that CHO cells overexpressing NPC1 were more resistant to induction of NPC cellular phenotypes than wild-type cells when exposed to TDM.
  • the extent of NPC 1 overexpression was proportional to the resistance to phenotype induction; cells over-expressing NPC1 by 15-fold were more resistant than those over-expressing NPC 1 5-fold.
  • Figure 11 shows the expression levels of NPC 1 and NPC2 proteins in RAW264.7 cells infected with BCG: expression of NPC1 protein was up regulated in infected cells, but there were no changes in NPC2 levels.
  • Figure 12 presents (i) micrographs and (ii) a histogram showing that RAW 246.7 cells in which an NPC phenotype was pharmacologically induced by incubation with U18666A, prior to infection, had impaired ability to clear non-pathogenic M. smegmatis relative to untreated cells.
  • Figure 13 is a histogram showing impaired clearance ofM smegmatis in Npcl 'A bone marrow-derived mouse macrophages and U18666A-treated wild-type mouse macrophages.
  • Figure 14 is a histogram showing impaired clearance ofM smegmatis in primary human macrophages treated with U18666A.
  • Figure 15 presents a fluorescence trace and a histogram showing the frequency and extent of mycobacterial infection of RAW264.7 cells treated with mCherry-expressing BCG for 48 hours, then treated with or without 30 ⁇ high-purity curcumin for a further 24 hours, by quantifying the fluorescence of mCherry-expressing M. bovis BCG using a FACS assay.
  • Figure 16 presents two histograms (i and ii) showing: (i, ii) that a significantly lower level of infection (i.e. enhanced clearance) was observed in cells incubated with curcumin relative to untreated cells; (i) that neither miglustat alone nor ⁇ -cyclodextrin alone promoted mycobacterial clearance over the time course; (i) that miglustat in combination with curcumin showed synergy; (ii) that no synergy was seen when curcumin and cyclodextrin were used in combination.
  • a significantly lower level of infection i.e. enhanced clearance
  • Figure 17 is a histogram showing that curcumin significantly reduced mycobacterial burden in infected primary human macrophages.
  • Figure 18 presents a graph and a histogram showing that, whilst high-purity curcumin
  • Figure 19 is a graph showing that bacterial clearance by curcumin was abrogated by loading cells with the Ca 2+ chelator, BAPTA, to suppress a cytosolic Ca 2+ increase.
  • Ci-20 alkyl group is an unsubstituted or substituted, straight or branched chain saturated hydrocarbon radical. Typically it is Ci-io alkyl, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl or decyl, or Ci-6 alkyl, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl or hexyl, or C1-4 alkyl, for example methyl, ethyl, i- propyl, n-propyl, t-butyl, s-butyl or n-butyl.
  • an alkyl group When an alkyl group is substituted it typically bears one or more substituents selected from substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl (as defined herein), cyano, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci- io)alkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, arylalkylamino, amido, acylamido, hydroxy, oxo, halo, carboxy, ester, acyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, aryloxy, haloalkyl, sulfonic acid, sulfhydryl (i.e.
  • alkyl groups include haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, alkoxyalkyl and alkaryl groups.
  • alkaryl as used herein, pertains to a Ci-20 alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom has been replaced with an aryl group.
  • a substituted Ci -2 o alkyl group carries 1, 2 or 3 substituents, for instance 1 or 2.
  • a C 3 -2 5 cycloalkyl group is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl group which is also a cyclyl group; that is, a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from an alicyclic ring atom of a carbocyclic ring of a carbocyclic compound, which moiety has from 3 to 25 carbon atoms (unless otherwise specified), including from 3 to 25 ring atoms.
  • cycloalkyl includes the sub-classes cycloalkyenyl and cycloalkynyl.
  • Examples of groups of C 3-25 cycloalkyl groups include C 3-2 o cycloalkyl, C 3 - i5 cycloalkyl, C 3 -io cycloalkyl, C 3 - 7 cycloalkyl.
  • a C 3-25 cycloalkyl group When a C 3-25 cycloalkyl group is substituted it typically bears one or more substituents selected from Ci-6 alkyl which is unsubstituted, aryl (as defined herein), cyano, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, arylalkylamino, amido, acylamido, hydroxy, oxo, halo, carboxy, ester, acyl, acyloxy, Ci -2 o alkoxy, aryloxy, haloalkyl, sulfonic acid, sulfhydryl (i.e.
  • thiol -SH
  • a substituted C 3-25 cycloalkyl group carries 1, 2 or 3 substituents, for instance 1 or 2.
  • C 3-25 cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from saturated monocyclic hydrocarbon compounds, which C 3-25 cycloalkyl groups are unsubstituted or substituted as defined above: cyclopropane (C 3 ), cyclobutane (C 4 ), cyclopentane (C 5 ), cyclohexane (C 6 ), cycloheptane (C 7 ), methylcyclopropane (C 4 ), dimethylcyclopropane (C 5 ),
  • camphene Cio
  • limonene Cio
  • pinene Cio
  • indene C9
  • indane e.g., 2,3-dihydro-lH-indene
  • tetraline e.g., 1,3-dihydro-lH-indene
  • a C3-20 heterocyclyl group is an unsubstituted or substituted monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a ring atom of a heterocyclic compound, which moiety has from 3 to 20 ring atoms (unless otherwise specified), of which from 1 to 10 are ring heteroatoms.
  • each ring has from 3 to 7 ring atoms, of which from 1 to 4 are ring heteroatoms.
  • a C3-20 heterocyclyl group When a C3-20 heterocyclyl group is substituted it typically bears one or more substituents selected from Ci-6 alkyl which is unsubstituted, aryl (as defined herein), cyano, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, arylalkylamino, amido, acylamido, hydroxy, oxo, halo, carboxy, ester, acyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, aryloxy, haloalkyl, sulfonic acid, sulfhydryl (i.e.
  • thiol -SH
  • a substituted C3 -20 heterocyclyl group carries 1, 2 or 3 substituents, for instance 1 or 2.
  • groups of heterocyclyl groups include C3-2oheterocyclyl,
  • Examples of (non-aromatic) monocyclic C3-20 heterocyclyl groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from:
  • Ni aziridine (C3), azetidine (C4), pyrrolidine (tetrahydropyrrole) (C5), pyrroline (e.g., 3-pyrroline, 2,5-dihydropyrrole) (C5), 2H-pyrrole or 3H-pyrrole (isopyrrole, isoazole) (C5), piperidine (C 6 ), dihydropyridine (C 6 ), tetrahydropyridine (C 6 ), azepine (C7);
  • Oi oxirane (C3), oxetane (C4), oxolane (tetrahydrofuran) (C5), oxole
  • O2 dioxolane (C5), dioxane (C 6 ), and dioxepane (C7);
  • N2 imidazolidine (C5), pyrazolidine (diazolidine) (C5), imidazoline (C5), pyrazoline (dihydropyrazole) (C5), piperazine (C 6 );
  • N1O1 tetrahydrooxazole (C5), dihydrooxazole (C5), tetrahydroisoxazole (C5), dihydroisoxazole (C5), morpholine (C 6 ), tetrahydrooxazine (C 6 ), dihydrooxazine (C 6 ), oxazine (C 6 );
  • N1 S1 thiazoline (C5), thiazolidine (C5), thiomorpholine (C 6 );
  • O1 S1 oxathiole (C5) and oxathiane (thioxane) (C 6 ); and,
  • N1O1 S1 oxathiazine (C 6 ).
  • substituted (non-aromatic) monocyclic heterocyclyl groups include those derived from saccharides, in cyclic form, for example, furanoses (C 5 ), such as arabinofuranose, lyxofuranose, ribofuranose, and xylofuranse, and pyranoses (C 6 ), such as allopyranose, altropyranose, glucopyranose, mannopyranose, gulopyranose, idopyranose, galactopyranose, and talopyranose.
  • C3-20 heterocyclyl includes groups derived from heterocyclic compounds of the following structure:
  • C3-20 heterocyclyl includes groups of the following structure:
  • each of the ring carbon atoms is independently unsubstituted or substituted with Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido.
  • C3-20 heterocyclyl also includes groups in which two heterocyclic rings are linked by an oxygen atom.
  • C3-20 heterocyclyl includes disaccharide groups, in which two monosaccharide heterocyclic rings are linked with an oxygen atom.
  • C3-20 heterocyclyl includes groups of the following formula (m):
  • each R m which is the same or different, is independently selected from Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy,
  • Ci-io alkylamino di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido.
  • disaccharide group is one example of a substituted C3-20 heterocyclic group:
  • C3-20 heterocyclyl groups which are also aryl groups are described below as heteroaryl groups.
  • An aryl group is a substituted or unsubstituted, monocyclic or bicyclic aromatic group which typically contains from 6 to 14 carbon atoms, preferably from 6 to 10 carbon atoms in the ring portion. Examples include phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl and indanyl groups. An aryl group is unsubstituted or substituted.
  • aryl group as defined above When an aryl group as defined above is substituted it typically bears one or more substituents selected from Ci-C 6 alkyl which is unsubstituted (to form an aralkyl group), aryl which is unsubstituted, cyano, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, arylalkylamino, amido, acylamido, hydroxy, halo, carboxy, ester, acyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, aryloxy, haloalkyl, sulfhydryl (i.e.
  • a substituted aryl group may be substituted in two positions with a single Ci-6 alkylene group, or with a bidentate group represented by the formula -X-Ci-6 alkylene, or -X-Ci-6 alkylene-X-, wherein X is selected from O, S and R, and wherein R is H, aryl or Ci-6 alkyl.
  • a substituted aryl group may be an aryl group fused with a cycloalkyl group or with a heterocyclyl group.
  • aralkyl as used herein, pertains to an aryl group in which at least one hydrogen atom (e.g., 1, 2, 3) has been substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl group.
  • examples of such groups include, but are not limited to, tolyl (from toluene), xylyl (from xylene), mesityl (from mesitylene), and cumenyl (or cumyl, from cumene), and duryl (from durene).
  • the ring atoms of an aryl group may include one or more heteroatoms (as in a heteroaryl group).
  • Such an aryl group is a substituted or unsubstituted mono- or bicyclic heteroaromatic group which typically contains from 6 to 10 atoms in the ring portion including one or more heteroatoms. It is generally a 5- or 6-membered ring, containing at least one heteroatom selected from O, S, N, P, Se and Si. It may contain, for example, 1, 2 or 3 heteroatoms.
  • heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, quinolyl and isoquinolyl.
  • a heteroaryl group may be unsubstituted or substituted, for instance, as specified above for aryl. Typically it carries 0, 1, 2 or 3 substituents.
  • Ci-20 alkylene group is an unsubstituted or substituted bidentate moiety obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms, either both from the same carbon atom, or one from each of two different carbon atoms, of a hydrocarbon compound having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms (unless otherwise specified), which may be aliphatic or alicyclic, and which may be saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated.
  • alkylene includes the sub-classes alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkylene, etc., discussed below. Typically it is Ci-io alkylene, for instance Ci-6 alkylene.
  • Ci-4 alkylene for example methylene, ethylene, i-propylene, n-propylene, t-butylene, s-butylene or n- butylene. It may also be pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene and the various branched chain isomers thereof.
  • An alkylene group may be unsubstituted or substituted, for instance, as specified above for alkyl.
  • a substituted alkylene group carries 1, 2 or 3 substituents, for instance 1 or 2.
  • the prefixes e.g., Ci-4, C 1-7 , C 1-20 , C 2-7 , C 3-7 , etc.
  • the term denote the number of carbon atoms, or range of number of carbon atoms.
  • the term e.g., Ci-4, C 1-7 , C 1-20 , C 2-7 , C 3-7 , etc.
  • Ci-4alkylene as used herein, pertains to an alkylene group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • groups of alkylene groups include Ci-4 alkylene ("lower alkylene”), Ci-7 alkylene, Ci-io alkylene and C 1 -20 alkylene.
  • linear saturated C 1-7 alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, -(03 ⁇ 4) ⁇ - where n is an integer from 1 to 7, for example, -CH 2 - (methylene), -CH2CH2- (ethylene), -CH2CH2CH2- (propylene), and -CH2CH2CH2CH2- (butylene).
  • branched saturated C 1-7 alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, -CH(CH 3 )-, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -,
  • alicyclic saturated C 1-7 alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopentylene (e.g., cyclopent-l,3-ylene), and cyclohexylene (e.g., cyclohex-l,4-ylene).
  • alicyclic partially unsaturated C 1-7 alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopentenylene (e.g., 4-cyclopenten-l,3-ylene), cyclohexenylene (e.g., 2-cyclohexen- 1 ,4-ylene; 3 -cy clohexen- 1 ,2-ylene; 2,5-cyclohexadien- 1 ,4-ylene).
  • cyclopentenylene e.g., 4-cyclopenten-l,3-ylene
  • cyclohexenylene e.g., 2-cyclohexen- 1 ,4-ylene; 3 -cy clohexen- 1 ,2-ylene; 2,5-cyclohexadien- 1 ,4-ylene.
  • C 1-20 alkylene and C 1-20 alkyl groups as defined herein are either uninterrupted or interrupted by one or more heteroatoms or heterogroups, such as S, O or N(R") wherein R" is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl (typically phenyl), or by one or more arylene (typically phenylene) groups.
  • the phrase "optionally interrupted” as used herein thus refers to a C 1-20 alkyl group or an alkylene group, as defined above, which is uninterrupted or which is interrupted between adjacent carbon atoms by a heteroatom such as oxygen or sulfur, by a heterogroup such as N(R") wherein R" is H, aryl or Ci-C 6 alkyl, or by an arylene group.
  • a C 1-20 alkyl group such as n-butyl may be interrupted by the heterogroup N(R") as follows: -CH 2 N(R")CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 N(R")CH 2 CH 3 , or
  • an alkylene group such as n-butylene may be interrupted by the heterogroup N(R") as follows: -CH 2 N(R")CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -,
  • an interrupted group for instance an interrupted C 1-20 alkylene or C 1-20 alkyl group, is interrupted by 1, 2 or 3 heteroatoms or heterogroups or by 1, 2 or 3 arylene (typically phenylene) groups. More typically, an interrupted group, for instance an interrupted C 1-20 alkylene or C 1-20 alkyl group, is interrupted by 1 or 2 heteroatoms or heterogroups or by 1 or 2 arylene (typically phenylene) groups. For instance, a C 1-20 alkyl group such as n-butyl may be interrupted by 2 heterogroups N(R") as follows: -CH 2 N(R")CH 2 N(R")CH 2 CH 3 .
  • An arylene group is an unsubstituted or substituted bidentate moiety obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms, one from each of two different aromatic ring atoms of an aromatic compound, which moiety has from 5 to 14 ring atoms (unless otherwise specified). Typically, each ring has from 5 to 7 or from 5 to 6 ring atoms.
  • An arylene group may be unsubstituted or substituted, for instance, as specified above for aryl.
  • the prefixes e.g., C5-20, C6-20, C5-14, C5-7, C5-6, etc. denote the number of ring atoms, or range of number of ring atoms, whether carbon atoms or heteroatoms.
  • C5-6 arylene refers to an arylene group having 5 or 6 ring atoms.
  • groups of arylene groups include C5-20 arylene, C 6 -2o arylene, C5-14 arylene, C 6 -i4 arylene, C 6 -io arylene, C5-12 arylene, C5-10 arylene, C5-7 arylene, C5-6 arylene, C5 arylene, and C 6 arylene.
  • the ring atoms may be all carbon atoms, as in "carboarylene groups" (e.g., C 6 -2o carboarylene, C 6 -i4 carboarylene or C 6 -io carboarylene).
  • carboarylene groups e.g., C 6 -2o carboarylene, C 6 -i4 carboarylene or C 6 -io carboarylene.
  • C 6 -2o arylene groups which do not have ring heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, those derived from the compounds discussed above in regard to aryl groups, e.g. phenylene, and also include those derived from aryl groups which are bonded together, e.g. phenylene-phenylene (diphenylene) and phenyl ene-pheny 1 ene-pheny 1 ene (tripheny 1 ene) .
  • the ring atoms may include one or more heteroatoms, as in
  • heteroarylene groups e.g., C5-10 heteroarylene.
  • C5-10 heteroarylene groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from the compounds discussed above in regard to heteroaryl groups.
  • R is an acyl substituent, for example, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group.
  • acyloxy (or reverse ester) represents a group of formula:
  • R is an acyloxy substituent, for example, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted C 3 - 2oheterocyclyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, typically a Ci-6 alkyl group.
  • phosphonic acid represents a group of the formula:
  • phosphonic acid salt represents a group which is a salt of a phosphonic acid group.
  • X + may be an alkali metal cation.
  • X + may be Na + or K + , for example.
  • phosphonate ester represents a group of one of the formulae:
  • each R is independently a phosphonate ester substituent, for example, -H, substituted or unsubstituted C 1-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3- 2o heterocyclyl, C 3 - 2o heterocyclyl substituted with a further C 3- 2o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkylene-C 3 - 2o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 - 25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 1-20 alkylene-C 3 - 25 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C 1-20 alkylene-aryl.
  • phosphoric acid represents a group of the formula:
  • amino represents a group of formula -NH 2 .
  • Ci- C10 alkylamino represents a group of formula - FR ' wherein R ' is a Ci-10 alkyl group, preferably a Ci-6 alkyl group, as defined previously.
  • di(Ci-io)alkylamino represents a group of formula -NR ' R ' ' wherein R ' and R ' ' are the same or different and represent C 1-10 alkyl groups, preferably Ci-6 alkyl groups, as defined previously.
  • arylamino represents a group of formula -NHR ' wherein R ' is an aryl group, preferably a phenyl group, as defined previously.
  • diarylamino represents a group of formula -NR ' R " wherein R ' and R " are the same or different and represent aryl groups, preferably phenyl groups, as defined previously.
  • arylalkylamino represents a group of formula -NR ' R " wherein R ' is a Ci-io alkyl group, preferably a Ci-6 alkyl group, and R " is an aryl group, preferably a phenyl group.
  • R 1 and R 2 may together form a cyclic structure, as in, for exam le, succinimidyl, maleimidyl, and phthalimidyl:
  • Ci-io alkylthio group is a said Ci-io alkyl group, preferably a Ci-6 alkyl group, attached to a thio group.
  • An arylthio group is an aryl group, preferably a phenyl group, attached to a thio group.
  • Ci-20 alkoxy group is a said substituted or unsubstituted Ci -2 o alkyl group attached to an oxygen atom.
  • a Ci-6 alkoxy group is a said substituted or unsubstituted Ci alkyl group attached to an oxygen atom.
  • a C1-4 alkoxy group is a substituted or unsubstituted C1-4 alkyl group attached to an oxygen atom. Said Ci-20, Ci-6 and C1-4 alkyl groups are optionally interrupted as defined herein.
  • C1-4 alkoxy groups include, -OMe (methoxy), -OEt (ethoxy), -O(nPr) (n-propoxy), -O(iPr) (isopropoxy), -O(nBu) (n-butoxy), -O(sBu) (sec-butoxy), -O(iBu) (isobutoxy), and -O(tBu) (tert-butoxy).
  • Ci-20 alkoxy groups are -O(Adamantyl), -O-CFFi-Adamantyl and -O- CFFi-CFFi-Adamantyl.
  • An aryloxy group is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, as defined herein, attached to an oxygen atom.
  • An example of an aryloxy group is -OPh (phenoxy).
  • a reference to carboxylic acid or carboxyl group also includes the anionic (carboxylate) form (-COO " ), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms.
  • a reference to an amino group includes the protonated form (- ⁇ HR ⁇ 2 ), a salt or solvate of the amino group, for example, a hydrochloride salt, as well as conventional protected forms of an amino group.
  • a reference to a hydroxyl group also includes the anionic form (- O " ), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms.
  • Certain compounds may exist in one or more particular geometric, optical, enantiomeric, diasteriomeric, epimeric, atropic, stereoisomeric, tautomeric,
  • conformational, or anomeric forms including but not limited to, cis- and trans-forms; E- and Z-forms; c-, t-, and r- forms; endo- and exo-forms; R-, S-, and meso-forms; D- and Informs; d- and 1-forms; (+) and (-) forms; keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms; syn- and anti- forms; synclinal- and anticlinal-forms; a- and ⁇ -forms; axial and equatorial forms; boat-, chair-, twist-, envelope-, and halfchair- forms; and combinations thereof, hereinafter collectively referred to as "isomers" (or "isomeric forms").
  • a reference to a methoxy group, -OCH3 is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, a hydroxymethyl group, -CH2OH.
  • a reference to ortho-chlorophenyl is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, meta-chlorophenyl.
  • Ci-7alkyl includes n-propyl and iso-propyl; butyl includes n-, iso-, sec-, and tert-butyl; methoxyphenyl includes ortho-, meta-, and para-methoxyphenyl).
  • keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol, amidine/amidine, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, N-nitroso/hyroxyazo, and nitro/aci-nitro.
  • H may be in any isotopic form, including 3 ⁇ 4, 2 H (D), and 3 H (T); C may be in any isotopic form, including 12 C, 13 C, and 14 C; O may be in any isotopic form, including 16 0 and 18 0; and the like.
  • a reference to a particular compound includes all such isomeric forms, including (wholly or partially) racemic and other mixtures thereof.
  • a reference to a particular compound also includes ionic, salt, solvate, protected forms and prodrugs thereof.
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds for use in accordance with the present invention include salts with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulphuric acid, nitric acid and phosphoric acid; and organic acids such as methanesulfonic acid, benzenesulphonic acid, formic acid, acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, isobutyric acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, ethanesulfonic acid, aspartic acid, benzoic acid and glutamic acid.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulphuric acid, nitric acid and phosphoric acid
  • organic acids such as methanesulfonic acid, benzenesulphonic acid,
  • the salt is a hydrochloride, an acetate, a propionate, a benzoate, a butyrate or an isobutyrate.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al., 1977, "Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts," J. Pharm. Sci., Vol. 66, pp. 1-19.
  • biosynthesis is a compound which, when metabolised (e.g., in vivo), yields the desired active compound.
  • the prodrug is inactive, or less active than the active compound, but may provide advantageous handling, administration, or metabolic
  • some prodrugs are O-acylated (acyloxy) derivatives of the active compound, i.e. physiologically acceptable metabolically labile acylated derivatives.
  • R p may be a C 1-10 alkyl group, an aryl group or a C3-20 cycloalkyl group.
  • R p is a Ci-10 alkyl group including, but not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl and decyl.
  • Such derivatives may be formed by acylation, for example, of any of the hydroxyl groups (-OH) in the parent compound, with, where appropriate, prior protection of any other reactive groups present in the parent compound, followed by deprotection if required.
  • the free hydroxyl groups on an iminosugar inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis for instance DNJ, DGJ, or an N-alkylated derivative of DNJ or DGJ such as NB-DNJ or NB-DGJ
  • the O-acyl groups are enzymatically removed in vivo to provide the non-O-acylated (i.e. hydroxyl-containing) active inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
  • Some prodrugs are esters of the active compound (e.g., a physiologically
  • the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis can be used in the free form or the salt form. Either or both agents may also be used in prodrug form.
  • the prodrug can itself be used in the free form or the salt form.
  • SERCA antagonists are known compounds. J. Med. Chem. 2005, 48, 7005-7011 describes thapsigargin and various analogs thereof as potent SERCA antagonists, and compares the respective activities of the compounds. Curcumin is also a SERCA antagonist; Eur. J. Biochem, 268, 6318-6327 (2001) details the SERCA inhibitory activity of curcumin. Cyclopiazonic acid is also a known SERCA antagonist.
  • SERCA antagonists may be readily identified, without undue experimentation, using known procedures. J. Med. Chem. 2005, 48, 7005-701 1 describes how SERCA antagonists may be designed (for instance, using the structure of a known SERCA antagonist as a starting point) and then tested for SERCA inhibitory activity. A standard assay for the measurement of SERCA inhibitory activity is described in J. Med. Chem. 2005, 48, p 7010. Eur. J.
  • Biochem, 268, 6318-6327 also describes how Ca 2+ ATPase activity can be determined, in order to identify SERCA antagonists, using a phosphate liberation assay described in Longland et al., Cell Calcium 24, 27-34 (1998).
  • the SERCA antagonist employed in the present invention may for instance be selected from curcumin, c clopiazonic acid and a compound of formula (A):
  • R Z1 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, halo, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-io alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-io alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, Ci-io alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3- 25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said Ci-10 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene;
  • R Z2 is selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-10 alkyl and acyl, wherein said Ci-10 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene; and
  • R' is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl
  • R Z1 is selected from H and ester. More typically, R Z1 is selected from H and -OC(0)(CH 2 ) 6 CH 3 .
  • R Z2 is selected from Ci-10 alkyl and acyl. More typically, R Z2 is selected from ethyl and acetyl (i.e. -C(0)CH 3 ).
  • X Z1 is CH and X Z2 is C(H)Me.
  • X Z1 is C and X Z2 is C(H)Me.
  • R Z1 is -OC(0)(CH 2 ) 6 CH 3
  • R Z2 is -C(0)CH 3
  • X Z1 is C and X Z2 is C(H)Me (i.e. the compound of formula A is thapsigargin).
  • R Z1 is H
  • R Z2 is -C(0)CH 3
  • X Z1 is C
  • X Z2 is C(H)Me (i.e. the compound of formula A is nortrilobolide).
  • R Z1 is H
  • R Z2 is ethyl
  • X Z1 is CH
  • X Z2 is C(H)Me.
  • R Z1 is H
  • R Z2 is -C(0)CH 3
  • X Z1 is CH
  • X Z2 is C(H)Me.
  • the SERCA antagonist employed in the present invention may for instance be selected from curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • the SERCA antagonist is selected from thapsigargin, curcumin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • thapsigargin The structure of thapsigargin is as follows
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin.
  • inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis means a compound that is capable of inhibiting the synthesis or expression of a glycosphingolipid (GSL).
  • GSL glycosphingolipid
  • the GSL is a ganglioside.
  • the GSL is a neutral GSL.
  • Inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis are either known or readily
  • GSLs are synthesized from ceramide by the sequential addition of monosaccharides mediated by Golgi-resident glycosyltransferases.
  • the two main classes of GSL are the neutral GSLs (lacto and globo series) and the gangliosides. Gangliosides contain sialic acid (neuraminic acid) and are consequently negatively charged.
  • the majority of GSLs are glucose derivatives of ceramide.
  • galactose based GSLs are also present and are particularly abundant in the CNS. Such galactose-based GSLs include the sulfatides.
  • a class of compounds which can affect the metabolism of glycosphingolipids is that of formula (I) defined below.
  • Some of these compounds (notably, NB-DNJ, miglustat) have found use in the treatment of congenital disorders of glycolipid storage (such as type I Gaucher disease, reviewed in Aerts JM et al. J. Inherit Metab. Dis. (2006) 29(2-3): 449- 453) and as potential anti-microbial agents (for example to modulate the toxicity of cholera toxin to ganglioside-type glycolipids, reviewed in Svensson M et al. Mol Microbiol. (2003) 47: 453-461).
  • GSL storage disorders Small-molecule inhibitors such as the alkyl-imino sugars have been developed to inhibit the biosynthesis of glucosylceramide, the first step in the biosynthesis of GSLs. Such compounds are thus inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis which may be employed in the present invention.
  • Glucosylceramide is synthesised by the action of glucosylceramide synthase (also known as UDP-glucose: N-acylsphingosine
  • glucosyltransferase which catalyses the transfer of glucose to ceramide.
  • the inhibition of glucosylceramide synthase can be achieved in vivo by small-molecule inhibitors
  • Inhibition can be achieved by small-molecule mimics of the substrate, transition state or product of glucosylceramide synthase.
  • Such inhibitors include: (1) mimics of the carbohydrate moiety ("sugar mimics"), and (2) mimics of the ceramide or sphingosine moiety ("lipid mimics").
  • the sugar mimics (1) have received considerable attention and include
  • iminosugars such as nojirimycin, N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) and
  • N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ) (see US 5,472,969; US 5,656,641 ; US
  • NB-DNJ results in measurable decrease in GSL levels within a day of treatment with the effect on GSL levels stabilizing after 10 days of treatment in mice (Piatt FM J. Biol. Chem. (1997) Aug
  • NB-DNJ and NB-DGJ penetrate the CNS without significant effects on behaviour or CNS development, and treatment of adult mice with NB-DNJ or NB-DGJ has been shown not to cause neurological side effects (U. Andersson et al, Neurobiology of Disease, 16 (2004) 506-515).
  • NB-DGJ resulted in a marked reduction in total ganglioside and GMl content in cerebrum-brainstem (Kasperzyk et al. J. Lipid Res. (2005) 46:744-751).
  • Lipid mimics (2) have been developed to inhibit glycosphingolipid biosynthesis (Abe A. et al. J. Biochem Tokyo (1992) 11 1 : 191-196. Reviewed in Asano N.
  • Ceramide-based inhibitors include D,L-threo-l-phenyl- 2-decanoylamino-3-morpholino-l-propanol (PDMP) and D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2- hexadecanoylamino-3-morpholino-l-propanol (PPMP).
  • PDMP D,L-threo-l-phenyl- 2-decanoylamino-3-morpholino-l-propanol
  • PPMP hexadecanoylamino-3-morpholino-l-propanol
  • L-DMDP (Yu CY et al. Chem Commun (Camb). 2004 Sep 7;(17): 1936-7) has also been developed. Small-molecule inhibitors of galactosyltransferases have also been developed and are described in Chung SJ, Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 1998 Dec l;8(23):3359-64.
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an inhibitor of a glycosyltransferase.
  • the inhibitor mimics the substrate, transition state or product of the glycosyltransferase.
  • the inhibitor may be a compound that mimics the carbohydrate moiety of the substrate, transition state or product of the glycosyltransferase.
  • the inhibitor is a compound that mimics the lipid moiety of the substrate, transition state or product of the
  • the glycosyltransferase is a glucosyltransferase.
  • the glucosyltransferase is, for instance, glucosylceramide synthase.
  • the glycosyltransferase may be a galactosyltransferase.
  • the galactosyltransferase may be, for instance, ⁇ 1-4 galactosyltransferase.
  • the glycosyltransferase may be a ceramide galactosyltransferase.
  • the ceramide galactosyltransferase may be, for instance, UDP-galactose:ceramide galactosyltransferase (also known as galactosylceramide synthase).
  • Such substrate mimics can be employed for use in the present invention as inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
  • inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis can be identified by incubating and or growing cells in culture in the presence of the putative inhibitor together with an assay for the effect of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
  • assays include the analysis of fluorescently-labelled glycosphingolipid carbohydrate headgroups by HPLC, thin-layer chromatography (TLC) of glycosphingolipids and analysis of glycosphingolipids using mass spectrometry (Neville DC, Anal. Biochem. 2004 Aug 15;331(2):275-82; Mellor HR Biochem. J. 2004 Aug l;381(Pt 3):861-6; Hayashi Y.
  • Neville et al. The assay described in Neville et al. enables GSL levels to be measured by HPLC analysis of GSL-derived oligosaccharides following ceramide glycanase digestion of the GSLs and anthranilic acid labelling of the released oligosaccharides.
  • glyocosphingolipids GSLs
  • the extracted GSLs are then digested with ceramide glycanase.
  • the extracted GSLs are first dried and redissolved, with mixing in 10 ⁇ incubation buffer (50 ⁇ sodium acetate, pH 5.0, containing lmg/ml sodium cholate or sodium
  • ceramide glycanase in a further 10 ⁇ incubation buffer (giving a final concentration of 2.5 U/ml).
  • U is defined as the amount of enzyme that will hydrolyze 1.0 nmol of ganglioside, GM1, per minute at 37 °C. Incubations are performed at 37 °C for 18 hours.
  • the ceramide- glycanase-released oligosaccharides are then labelled with anthranilic acid and purified essentially as described in Anumula and Dhume, Glycobiology 8 (1998) 685-694 with the modifications described in Neville DC et al. Anal. Biochem.
  • Hayashi Y. et al, Anal. Biochem. 2005 Oct 15;345(2): 181-6 reports an HPLC- based method that uses fluorescent acceptors and nonradioisotope UDP-sugar donors to provide a fast, sensitive and reproducible assay to determine glucosylceramide synthase (GlcT) and lactosylceramide synthase (GalT) activities.
  • GlcT glucosylceramide synthase
  • GalT lactosylceramide synthase
  • glycosphingolipid biosynthesis for use in accordance with the present invention can be identified by incubating and or growing cells in culture in the presence of the putative inhibitor, and applying the assay method described in Hayashi et al.
  • the HPLC-based assay procedures described in Hayashi et al. involve mixing a fluorescent acceptor substrate, either 50pmol of C6-NBD-Cer or C6-NBD-GlcCer, and 6.5 nmol of lecithin in 100 ⁇ of ethanol, and then evaporating the solvent. Next 10 ⁇ of water is added and the mixture is sonicated to form liposomes.
  • reaction mixture contains 500 ⁇ UDP-Glc, ImM EDTA, 10 ⁇ C6-NBD-Cer liposome and 20 ⁇ of an appropriate amount of enzyme in lysis buffer 1.
  • 50 ⁇ of mixture contains 100 ⁇ UDP-Gal, 5mM MgCl 2 , 5mM MnCb, 10 ⁇ C6- BD-GlcCer liposome, and 20 ⁇ of an appropriate amount of enzyme in lysis buffer 2.
  • the assays are carried out at 37 °C for 1 hour. The reaction is stopped by adding 200 ⁇ of chloroform/methanol (2: 1, v/v).
  • a 100 ⁇ aliquot sample is then loaded onto a normal-phase column and eluted with isopropyl alcohol/ «-hexane/H 2 0 (55:44: 1) for the GlcT assay or isopropyl alcohol/ «- hexane/H 2 0/phosphoric acid (110:84:5.9:0.1) for the GalT assay at a flow rate of 2.0 ml/min.
  • Fluorescence can be determined using a fluorescent detector set to excitation and emission wavelengths of 470 and 530 nm, respectively. Fluorescent peaks are identified by comparing their retention times with those of standards.
  • Further assays include fluorescent-activated cells sorting (FACS) with
  • glycosphingolipid-binding proteins such as anti-glycosphingolipid antibodies or lectins (see for example Rouquette-Jazdanian et al., The Journal of Immunology, 2005, 175:
  • glycosphingolipids are analysed by mass spectrometry or by TLC.
  • Inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis for use in accordance with the present invention can be identified by incubating and or growing cells in culture in the presence of the putative inhibitor, and applying the TLC assay method or mass spectrometry assay method described by Sandhoff et al. Further details of these methods are given below.
  • mice were measured by nano-electrospray ionization tandem mass spectrometry (nano-ESI-MS/MS).
  • nano-ESI-MS/MS nano-electrospray ionization tandem mass spectrometry
  • Glycosphingolipids were first extracted from murine tissue for mass spectrometric analysis.
  • the samples prepared included both the extracted GSLs and synthesised GSL MS standards.
  • Nano-ESI-MS/MS analyses were performed with a triple quadropole instrument equipped with a nano-electrospray source operating at an estimated flow rate of 20-50 nl/min.
  • Nano-ESI-MS/MS data could then be evaluated for quantification of the GSLs as follows: Quantitative spectra were measured with an average mass resolution of 1200 (ion mass/full width half maximum). Peak height values of the first mono-isotopic peak of each compound were taken for evaluation.
  • a linear trend was calculated from the peak intensities of the corresponding internal standard lipids.
  • the obtained calibration curve represented the intensity of the internal standard amount at a given m/z value.
  • the quantities of the individual species of a GSL were calculated using a corrected intensity ratio (sample GSL/internal standard trend), knowing the amount of the internal standard added. The amount of the GSL was then calculated from the sum of the individual molecular species.
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed in the present invention may be an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis of the following formula (I):
  • X is O, S or NR 5 ;
  • R 5 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-2o heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene- C3-20 heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-0-C3-2o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-20 heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-25 cycloalkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C3-20 heterocyclyl, or R 5 forms, together with R 1 , R 11 , R 4 or R 14 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, wherein said
  • n 0 or 1
  • Y is O, S or CR 6 R 16 ;
  • R 1 , R 11 , R 4 and R 14 which may be the same or different, are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, provided that one of R 1 , R 11 , R 4 and R 14 may form, together with R 5 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or
  • R 2 , R 12 , R 3 , R 13 , R 6 and R 16 which may be the same or different, are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted -O-Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene,
  • R 1 or R 11 is H.
  • R 2 or R 12 is H.
  • R 3 or R 13 is H.
  • R 4 or R 14 is H.
  • Y is CR 6 R 16 , either R 6 or R 16 (more typically R 16 ) is H.
  • R 1 or R 11 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, -O- C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl. More typically, R 11 is hydrogen and R 1 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O- C3-20 heterocyclyl.
  • R 1 or R 11 is Ci-20 alkoxy
  • said Ci-20 alkoxy group is substituted with an ester group or an aryl group, for instance with -C(0)OCH3 or Ph.
  • R 1 or R 11 is an aryloxy group
  • the aryl group bonded to the oxygen of said aryloxy is either substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, or substituted or unsubstituted naphthyl.
  • the phenyl or naphthyl is either unsubstituted or monosubstituted with halo or methoxy.
  • R 1 or R 11 When R 1 or R 11 is a substituted Ci-20 alkyl group, the substituent may be a hydroxyl, phosphate ester or phosphonate ester group.
  • R 1 or R 11 may be CH2OH or a group of the following formula (VII):
  • L is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene; x is 0 or 1; y is 0 or 1; A is CUR'" and R is H, Ci-20 alkyl, C3-20 heterocyclyl, C3-25 cycloalkyl, aryl or Ci-20 alkoxy, wherein R'" is hydroxyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy or acyl. Typically R'" is hydroxyl. Typically R is either -OCH3 or a heterocyclic group of the following structure:
  • both R 1 and R 11 are groups of formula (VII) above.
  • An example of a compound in which both R 1 and R 11 are groups of formula (VII) is cytidin-5'-yl sialylethylphosphonate.
  • R 1 or R 11 is unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, it is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl or decyl group.
  • the cycloalkyl group is a group derived from a compound of one of the following formulae, which compound may be substituted or unsubstituted:
  • group derived from a compound in this case means that the group is a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a carbon atom of the compound.
  • R 1 or R 11 is -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl
  • Soyasaponin I in which R 1 or R 11 has the followin structure:
  • heterocyclyl group is a group derived from a monosaccharide in cyclic form, for instance a group of the following structure:
  • R 80 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido.
  • group derived from in this case means that the group is a monovalent moiety obtained by removing the R 80 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 or R 84 atom from a carbon atom of the above compound.
  • R 1 or R 11 is -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl
  • said -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl group is a group of any one of the following structures
  • R 51 is a substituted or unsubstituted C 1-10 alkyl group, typically methyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, typically a phenyl or naphthyl group.
  • the phenyl or naphthyl may be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • the phenyl or naphthyl is typically substituted with a halo group, for instance with a bromo group.
  • R 52 is typically hydroxyl, Ci-io alkoxy, acyloxy, aryloxy or acylamido.
  • R 52 is -OH or - HC(0)Me.
  • R 2 or R 12 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, acylamido, Ci-20 alkoxy, Ci-20 alkyl and -O-C3-20
  • R 12 is hydrogen and R 2 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, Ci-20 alkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl.
  • acylamido is - HC(0)CH3.
  • R 2 or R 12 is acyloxy
  • said acyloxy is selected from
  • acyloxy is -OC(0)CH2CH2CH3.
  • heterocyclyl group is a group derived from a monosaccharide in cyclic form, for instance a group of the following structur
  • R 80 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci- 6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido and a group derived from a second group of the following structure: in which second group x is 0 or 1; z is CHR ; and R , R , R , R and R , which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido.
  • group derived from in this case means that the group is a monovalent moiety obtained by removing the R 80 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 or R 84 atom or group from a carbon atom of the compound.
  • said heterocyclyl group may be a group of the following structure: wherein each of the ring carbon atoms is independently unsubstituted or substituted with Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-io alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido.
  • An example of a compound in which R 2 or R 12 is -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl is Soyasaponin I, in which R 2 or R 12 is a group of the following structure:
  • R 2 or R 12 is Ci-20 alkoxy or Ci-20 alkyl
  • the group is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy or hexoxy.
  • R 2 or R 12 is selected from H, OH, -OC(0)CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 and HC(0)CH 3 . In another embodiment, R 2 or R 12 is selected from H and OH.
  • R 3 or R 13 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, acylamido, Ci-20 alkoxy and Ci -2 o alkyl. More typically, R 13 is hydrogen and R 3 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci -2 o alkoxy and Ci -2 o alkyl.
  • acylamido is - HC(0)CH 3 .
  • R 3 or R 13 is acyloxy
  • said acyloxy is selected from
  • R 3 or R 13 is Ci -2 o alkoxy or Ci -2 o alkyl
  • the group is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy or hexoxy.
  • R 3 or R 13 is selected from H, OH and HC(0)CH 3 . In another embodiment, R 3 or R 13 is selected from H and OH.
  • R 4 or R 14 is hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, carboxyl, ester or Ci -2 o alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, or R 4 or R 14 forms, together with R 5 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group. More typically, R 14 is hydrogen and R 4 is hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, carboxyl, ester or Ci-20 alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, or R 4 forms, together with R 5 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group.
  • R 4 or R 14 is acyloxy
  • said acyloxy is selected from -OC(0)CH3, -
  • R 4 or R 14 is a Ci -2 o alkyl
  • said Ci -2 o alkyl is substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl, acyloxy, thiol and -SC(0)R 95 , wherein R 95 is Ci-6 alkyl.
  • said Ci -2 o alkyl is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl substituted with one, two, three or four groups respectively, which groups are selected from hydroxyl, acyloxy and thiol, more typically from hydroxyl and thiol.
  • R 4 or R 14 forms, together with R 5 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, said alkylene group is substituted or unsubstituted propylene.
  • said propylene is unsubstituted or substituted with a C1-4 alkyl group, for instance with a methyl group.
  • a C1-4 alkyl group for instance with a methyl group.
  • R 4 or R 14 forms, together with R 5 , a methyl- substituted propylene group are Castanospermine and MDL25874, whose structures are given below.
  • R 4 or R 14 is typically H, -CH 2 OH, -CH 2 SH, -CH(OH)CH(OH)CH 2 OH or -COOH or R 4 or R 14 forms, together with R 5 , a propylene group substituted with a methyl group.
  • n 1, Y is CR 6 R 16 and either R 6 or R 16 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, amino, Ci -2 o alkoxy and Ci -2 o alkyl. More typically, n is 1, Y is CR 6 R 16 , R 16 is hydrogen and R 6 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, amino, Ci -2 o alkoxy and Ci -2 o alkyl.
  • R 6 or R 16 is acyloxy
  • said acyloxy is selected from -OC(0)CH 3 , - OC(0)CH 2 CH 3 , -OC(0)CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 and -OC(0)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 .
  • R 6 or R 16 is Ci -2 o alkoxy or Ci -2 o alkyl
  • the group is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy or hexoxy.
  • R 6 or R 16 is selected from -OH and - H 2 .
  • n is 1 and Y is O or S. More typically, n is 1 and Y is O.
  • n 0.
  • R 5 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted Ci -2 o alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci -2 o alkylene-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci -2 o alkylene-C 3 -2 o heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci -2 o alkylene- C 3 -2 5 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci -2 o alkylene-C 3 -2 o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-O-C3-20 heterocyclyl or R 5 forms, together with R 1 , R 11 , R 4 or R 14 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene wherein R' is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl.
  • R 5 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl
  • the Ci-20 alkylene is interrtupted once by O and the C3-25 cycloalkyl is Adamantyl, and thus R 5 is -(Ci-10 alkylene)-0-CH2-Adamantyl.
  • R 5 is -(Ci-10 alkylene)-0-CH2-Adamantyl. This includes, for instance, -(CH2) 5 -0-CH2- Adamantyl.
  • Ci-20 alkylene-O-C3-20 heterocyclyl when R 5 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, said Ci-20 alkylene is unsubstituted, and is, for instance, an unsubstituted C1-4 alkylene group, for example ethylene.
  • said C3 -20 heterocyclyl is a group of the following formula (m):
  • each R m which is the same or different, is independently selected from Ci- 6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci- io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido. More typically, when R 5 is substituted or
  • Ci-20 alkylene-O-C3-20 heterocyclyl unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, said C3-20 heterocyclyl is a group of the following structure:
  • R 5 may be substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-20 heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3 -20 heterocyclyl or substituted or unsubstituted C3-25 cycloalkyl.
  • R 5 may be substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or substituted or unsubstituted cyclohexyl, for example.
  • X is NR 5
  • R 5 forms, together with R 4 or R 14 (typically R 4 ), a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, or R 5 is selected from hydrogen, unsubstituted or substituted Ci-20 alkyl which is optionally interrupted by O, and a group of the following formula (VIII)
  • R 40 and R 42 which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted phenyl;
  • R 43 is H, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or -C(0)R 47 ;
  • R 44 is H or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene;
  • R 47 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene;
  • L 40 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-10 alkylene.
  • R 40 is H.
  • R 42 is H.
  • R 43 is H or -C(0)R 47 . More typically, R 43 is -C(0)R 47 .
  • R 47 is unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl.
  • R 47 may be, for instance, C7H15 (as in eliglustat), C9H19 (as in PDMP) or C15H31 (as in the P4 compounds).
  • L 40 is CH2.
  • R 44 may be, for instance, -C13H27.
  • R 41 is a group of the following formula (Villa): in which R is H, Ci-6 alkyl, phenyl or, together with R a bidentate group of the structure -0-alk-O-; R 49 is H, Ci-6 alkyl, phenyl or, together with R 48 a bidentate group of the structure -0-alk-O-, wherein alk is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene.
  • R 48 is H or, together with R 49 a bidentate group of the structure -O-CH2-CH2-O
  • R is H, OH or, together with R a bidentate group of the structure -O-CH2- CH2-O-.
  • R 48 is H and R 49 is either H or OH.
  • R 5 is Ci-20 alkyl optionally interrupted by O
  • R 5 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, methyl-O-R 90 , ethyl-O-R 90 , propyl- O-R 90 , butyl-O-R 90 , pentyl-O-R 90 , hexyl-O-R 90 , heptyl-O-R 90 , octyl-O-R 90 , nonyl-O-R 90 or decyl-O-R 90 wherein R 90 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl or adamantyl.
  • R 5 forms, together with R 4 or R 14 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group
  • the alkylene group is substituted or unsubstituted propylene.
  • said propylene is unsubstituted or substituted with a C1-4 alkyl group, for instance with a methyl group.
  • a C1-4 alkyl group for instance with a methyl group.
  • R 4 or R 14 forms, together with R 5 , a methyl- substituted propylene group are Castanospermine and MDL25874, whose structures are given below.
  • X is O or S. More typically, X is O.
  • R 12 , R 13 , R 14 and R 16 are all H and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) b
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) and: X is NR 5 ; n is 1; Y is CHR 6 ; and R 5 is selected from: hydrogen and unsubstituted or substituted Ci-20 alkyl which is optionally interrupted by O, or R 5 forms, together with R 4 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group.
  • R 11 is H.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 6 which may be the same or different, are independently selected from H, OH, acyloxy, and substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl. When said Ci-6 alkyl is substituted, it is typically substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy.
  • R 4 is either Ci-6 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy, or R 4 forms, together with R 5 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group.
  • R 4 may be methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups respectively, which groups are selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy, more typically hydroxyl.
  • R 4 may be CH2OH.
  • R 4 may be a group which, together with R 5 , is a substituted or unsubstituted propylene group.
  • R 2 , R 3 and R 6 are all OH.
  • R 1 is selected from H, OH and Ci-6 alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy.
  • R 1 may be H, OH, unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl, which methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl are substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups respectively, which groups are selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy, more typically hydroxyl.
  • R 4 is H, OH, CH2OH or Ci-6 alkyl.
  • R 5 is Ci-20 alkyl which is optionally interrupted by O.
  • R 5 may be methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, methyl-O-R 90 , ethyl-O-R 90 , propyl- O-R 90 , butyl-O-R 90 , pentyl-O-R 90 , hexyl-O-R 90 , heptyl-O-R 90 , octyl-O-R 90 , nonyl-O-R 90 or decyl-O-R 90 wherein R 90 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl or adamantyl.
  • R 5 together with R 4 is a substituted or unsubstituted Ci- 6 alkylene group.
  • the alkylene group is substituted or unsubstituted propylene.
  • said propylene is unsubstituted or substituted with a C1-4 alkyl group, for instance with a methyl group.
  • R 5 may be H.
  • said acyloxy is selected from -OC(0)CH 3 , -OC(0)CH 2 CH 3 , -OC(0)CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 and - OC(0)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 .
  • R 5 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci -2 o alkylene-0-C 3 - 2 o heterocyclyl. More typically, R 5 is C1-4 alkylene-0-C 3 -2 o heterocyclyl, wherein said C1-4 alkylene is unsubstituted and said C 3 -2 o heterocyclyl is a group of the following formula (m):
  • each R m which are the same or different, is independently selected from Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-
  • R 5 is C1-4 alkylene-0-C 3 . ⁇ 20 heterocyclyl, wherein said C1-4 alkylene is unsubstituted and said C3-20 heterocyclyl is a group of the following structure:
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) and: X is NR 5 ; Y is O or S; n is either 0 or 1; and R 5 is selected from hydrogen and a group of the following formula (VIII):
  • R and R which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted phenyl;
  • R 43 is H, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or -C(0)R 47 ;
  • R 44 is H or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene;
  • R 47 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R
  • R 43 is H or -C(0)R 47 . More typically, R 43 is -C(0)R 47 .
  • R 47 is unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl.
  • R 47 may be, for instance, C7H15 (as in eliglustat), C9H19 (as in PDMP) or C15H31 (as in the P4 compounds).
  • L 40 is CH2.
  • R 44 may be, for instance, -C13H27.
  • R 41 is a group of the following formula (Villa): (Villa)
  • R 48 is H, Ci-6 alkyl, phenyl or, together with R 49 a bidentate group of the structure -0-alk-O-;
  • R 49 is H, Ci-6 alkyl, phenyl or, together with R 48 a bidentate group of the structure -0-alk-O-, wherein alk is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene.
  • R is H or, together with R a bidentate group of the structure -O-CH2-CH2-O-.
  • R 49 is H, OH or, together with R 48 a bidentate group of the structure -O-CH2- CH2-O-.
  • R 48 is H and R 49 is either H or OH.
  • R 11 is H.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 6 which may be the same or different, are independently selected from H, OH, acyloxy and Ci-6 alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy. More typically, in this embodiment, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 6 are independently selected from H, OH and CH2OH.
  • Y is O.
  • compounds of this embodiment include D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2-decanoylamino-3- morpholino- 1 -propanol (PDMP); D,L-threo- 1 -phenyl-2-hexadecanoylamino-3 - morpholino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3 -pyrrolidino- 1 - propanol (P4); 4'-hydroxy-D-threo-l-phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (4'-hydroxy-P4); 3',4'-ethylenedioxy-P4 (EtDO-P4); N-[(lR,2R)-l-(2,3-Dihydro-l,4- benzodioxin-6-yl)-l-hydroxy
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) and: X is O or S; n is 1; Y is CHR 6 ; R 6 is H, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, Ci-10 alkylamino or di(Ci-io)alkylamino; R 11 is H; R 2 and R 3 , which may be the same or different, are independently selected from H, hydroxyl, Ci-20 alkoxy, acyloxy or acylamido; R 4 is H, hydroxyl, acyloxy, thiol or Ci-20 alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl, acyloxy and thiol; and R 1 is Ci-20 alkoxy, aryloxy or -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl is a group derived from a group of the following structure:
  • X is O.
  • Examples of compounds of this embodiment are the Galactosyltransferase inhibitor compounds described in Chung SJ, Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 1998 Dec l;8(23):3359-64, whose structures are given hereinbelow.
  • R 1 is a group of any one of the following structures: and , in which
  • R 51 is a substituted or unsubstituted C 1-10 alkyl group, typically methyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, typically a phenyl or naphthyl group.
  • the phenyl or naphthyl may be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • the phenyl or naphthyl is typically substituted with a halo group, for instance with a bromo group.
  • R 52 is typically hydroxyl, Ci-io alkoxy, acyloxy, aryloxy or acylamido.
  • R 52 is -OH or - HC(0)Me.
  • R 1 may be C 1 -20 alkoxy wherein said C 1 -20 alkoxy group is substituted with an ester group or an aryl group, for instance with - C(0)OCH 3 or Ph.
  • R 1 may be aryloxy wherein the aryl group bonded to the oxygen of said aryloxy is either substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, or substituted or unsubstituted naphthyl.
  • the phenyl or naphthyl is either unsubstituted or monosubstituted with halo or methoxy.
  • R 6 is H, amino or hydroxyl, more typically, amino or hydroxyl.
  • R 2 is H, hydroxyl or - HC(0)CH 3 , more typically hydroxyl or - HC(0)CH 3 .
  • R 3 is H or hydroxyl, more typically hydroxyl.
  • R 4 is H, CH 2 OH or CH2SH, more typically CH 2 OH or CH 2 SH.
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) and:
  • X is O or S; n is 1; Y is CHR 6 ; R 6 is H, hydroxyl, acyloxy or Ci-20 alkoxy;
  • R 1 and R 11 which may be the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-20 alkyl, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, carboxyl, ester, -0-C 3 - 2 5 cycloalkyl, and a group of the following formula (VII):
  • L is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene; x is 0 or 1 ; y is 0 or 1 ; A is CHR'" and R is H, Ci-20 alkyl, C3-20 heterocyclyl, C3-25 cycloalkyl, aryl or Ci-20 alkoxy, wherein R'" is hydroxyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy or acyl;
  • R 2 is H, Ci-20 alkyl, hydroxyl, acyloxy or -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl is a group derived from a group of the following structure:
  • R 80 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci- 6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido and a group derived from a second group of the following structure: in which second group x is 0 or 1 ; z is CHR ; and R , R , R , R and R , which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido;
  • R 3 is H, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy or acylamido
  • R 4 is H, carboxyl, ester or Ci-20 alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl and thiol.
  • Examples of compounds of this embodiment are sialic acid, cytidin-5 '-yl sialylethylphosphonate and Soyasaponin I.
  • X is O
  • R 6 is H or hydroxyl, more typically hydroxyl.
  • R 1 and R 11 are independently selected from H, hydroxyl, carboxyl, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and a group of formula (VII) in which L 60 is ethylene or methylene, R'" is hydroxyl, and R is either -OCH3 or a heterocyclic group of the following structure: .
  • Both R 1 and R 11 may be groups of formula (VII).
  • the cycloalkyl group is a group derived from a compound of one of the following formulae, which compound may be substituted or unsubstituted:
  • the cycloalk l group of said -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl is a group derived from the
  • R 1 or R 11 is -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl
  • the other one of those groups, i.e. R 11 or R 1 respectively, is H.
  • R 2 is H or -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl is a group of the following structure:
  • each of the ring carbon atoms is independently unsubstituted or substituted with Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido.
  • each of the ring carbon atoms is independently unsubstituted or substituted with OH, 03 ⁇ 4 ⁇ ⁇ a Ci-6 alkyl group, for instance a methyl group.
  • R 3 is hydroxyl or acylamido. More typically, R 3 is hydroxyl or NHC(0)CH 3 .
  • R 4 is carboxyl, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl, which methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl are substituted with one, two, three and four groups respectively, which groups are selected from hydroxyl and thiol. More typically, R 4 is carboxyl or -CH(OH)CH(OH)CH 2 OH. Any of the following compounds of formula (I), and any pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the following compounds of formula (I), may be employed in the present invention:
  • Iminosugars such as: N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), also known as miglustat or ZAVESCA®; N-nonyldeoxynojirimycin (NN-DNJ); N- butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ); N-5-adamantane-l-yl-methoxypentyl- deoxynojirimycin (AMP-DNJ); alpha-homogalactonojirimycin (HGJ); Nojirimycin (NJ); Deoxynojirimycin (DNJ); N7-oxadecyl-deoxynojirimycin;
  • DGJ deoxygalactonojirimycin
  • NB-DGJ N-butyl-deoxygalactonojirimycin
  • N-DGJ N- nonyl-deoxygalactonojirimycin
  • N-nonyl-6deoxygalactonojirimycin N7-oxanonyl-6deoxy-DGJ
  • alpha-homoallonojirimycin HJ
  • beta-l-C-butyl- deoxygalactonojirimycin CB-DGJ
  • Such compounds are glycosyltransferase inhibitors ("sugar mimics").
  • Iminosugars such as Castanospermine and MDL25874, which have the following structures respectively:
  • Sialyltransferase inhibitors such as N-acetylneuraminic acid (sialic acid); cytidin- 5'-yl sialylethylphosphonate; and Soyasaponin I.
  • Iminosugars such as l,5-dideoxy-l,5-imino-D-glucitol, and their N-alkyl, N-acyl and N-aryl, and optionally O-acylated derivatives, such as: 1,5 -(Butylimino)- 1,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, also known as N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), miglustat or ZAVESCA®; l,5-(Methylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(Hexylimino)-l,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(Nonylylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(2- Ethylbutylimino)- 1 ,5 -dideoxy-D-glucitol; 1 ,5-(2-Methy
  • Iminosugars such as ido-N-(5-adamantane-l-yl-methoxy-pentyl)deoxynojirimycin;
  • N-nonyl-DNJ and N-decyl-DNJ can be conveniently prepared by the N-nonylation or N-decylation, respectively, of 1,5- dideoxy-l,5-imino-D-glucitol (DNJ) by methods analogous to the N-butylation of DNJ as described in Example 2 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,639,436 by substituting an equivalent amount of n-nonylaldehyde or n-decylaldehyde for n-butylraldehyde.
  • the starting materials are readily available from many commercial sources.
  • the compound of formula (I) employed is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ). More typically, the compound of formula ( ⁇ ) is JVB-DNJ.
  • NB-DGJ is the galactose analogue of NB-DNJ.
  • NB-DGJ inhibits GSL biosynthesis comparably to NB-DNJ but lacks certain side effect activities associated with NB-DNJ.
  • the compound of formula (I) employed is NB-DGJ.
  • the compound of formula (I) employed is selected from: ido-N-(5-adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)deoxynojirimycin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl- methoxypentyl)-L-ido-deoxynojirimycin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-D-galacto- deoxynojirimycin; C 1 -beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N- methyl-C 1 -beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-butyl-C 1 -beta- (adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-
  • the compound of formula (I) employed is selected from D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2-decanoylamino-3-mo holino-l-propanol (PDMP); D,L-threo- 1 -phenyl-2-hexadecanoylamino-3 -morpholino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2- palmitoilamino-3 -pyrrolidino- 1 -propanol (P4); 4' -hydroxy-D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2- palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (4'-hydroxy-P4); 3',4'-ethylenedioxy-P4 (EtDO- P4); N-[(1R,2R)- 1 -(2,3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1
  • the compound of formula (I) employed is N- [(1R,2R)- 1 -(2, 3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-2- propanyljoctanamide (eliglustat).
  • Eliglustat may be employed in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat, for instance in the form of eliglustat tartrate.
  • Tuberculosis is a global health problem affecting approximately one third of the world's population and resulting in three million deaths each year.
  • One of the characteristic hallmarks of tuberculosis is the ability oiMtb to successfully survive within cells of the innate immune system including macrophages and monocytes.
  • Non-pathogenic mycobacteria including Mycobacterium smegmatis, bind host cell- surface receptors and are ingested into phagosomes that subsequently mature and fuse with lysosomes, leading to destruction of the mycobacterium.
  • pathogenic mycobacteria are not delivered to the lysosome due to the mycobacterium inhibiting phagosome-lysosome fusion.
  • Multiple mechanisms have been proposed to explain the intracellular survival oiMtb, including phagosome maturation arrest, and defective acidification of the phagosome and inhibition of phosphatidylinositol-dependent trafficking pathways.
  • the present inventors have investigated whether there is a mechanistic link between pathogenic mycobacterial infection and the NPC pathway.
  • the inventors unexpectedly found that pathogenic mycobacteria, including Mycobacterium tuberculosis, secrete lipids that inhibit the NPC pathway, promoting the intra-cellular survival of the mycobacteria in host macrophages.
  • This link between the rare lysosomal storage disorder NPC and Mtb infection has important implications for understanding host-pathogen interactions and for developing new therapies to combat TB, particularly in the current era of antibiotic resistance.
  • Other classes of agent known to be useful against NPC disease did not promote mycobacterial clearance by themselves, including an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis miglustat (NB-DNJ), and ⁇ -cyclodextrin.
  • NB-DNJ glycosphingolipid biosynthesis miglustat
  • ⁇ -cyclodextrin a structural analog of curcumin that does not function as SERCA antagonist was found not to promote clearance of the mycobacterium.
  • the data herein support that the lipids secreted by the pathogenic mycobacteria inhibit the NPC pathway to achieve altered acidic store calcium homeostasis, that in turn blocks the ability of the lysosome to fuse and kill the mycobacterium, leading to persistence.
  • a SERCA antagonist which elevates cytosolic calcium
  • an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis showed significantly greater efficacy than the SERCA antagonist on its own and, of course, than the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis on its own which showed no activity. It is therefore a surprising finding of the present invention that a SERCA antagonist can advantageously be used in combination with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis in order to treat infections caused by pathogenic mycobacteria.
  • Infections caused by pathogenic mycobacteria can advantageously therefore be treated by the combination of a SERCA antagonist and an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
  • An infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention, is an infection caused by one or more pathogenic Mycobacteria. In other words, it is a pathogenic mycobacterial infection.
  • Such infections include the infectious disease tuberculosis.
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium is tuberculosis.
  • the pathogenic mycobacterium which most commonly causes tuberculosis in humans is Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
  • other pathogenic mycobacteria such as Mycobacterium bovis, Mycobacterium africanum, Mycobacterium cannetti, and
  • Mycobacterium microtti also cause tuberculosis (although these species are less common in humans).
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium bovis, Mycobacterium africanum, Mycobacterium cannetti or Mycobacterium microtti.
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infectious disease.
  • the infectious disease is tuberculosis.
  • the present invention provides a combination comprising a SERCA antagonist and an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, which combination is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
  • the invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a SERCA antagonist, an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, which composition is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
  • the invention also provides a SERCA antagonist, which SERCA antagonist is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, by
  • the invention also provides an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, which inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with a SERCA antagonist.
  • the invention also provides a method of treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, which method comprises administering to a human or animal patient in need of such treatment an effective amount of a SERCA antagonist and an effective amount of an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
  • the invention also provides a kit of parts comprising a SERCA antagonist together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by Mycobacterium
  • the invention also provides a kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of
  • glycosphingolipid biosynthesis together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with a SERCA antagonist, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by
  • the invention also provides a kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of
  • glycosphingolipid biosynthesis a SERCA antagonist
  • tuberculosis Preferably said patient is human.
  • the SERC A antagonist employed in the present invention is selected from: curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed in the present invention is selected from an iminosugar, D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2- decanoylamino-3-morpholino-l-propanol (PDMP); D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2- hexadecanoylamino-3 -morpholino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2- palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (P4); 4'-hydroxy-D-threo-l-phenyl-2- palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (4'-hydroxy-P4); 3',4'-ethylenedioxy-
  • the SERCA antagonist employed in the present invention may be selected from: curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed in the present invention may be selected from an iminosugar, N- [(1R,2R)- 1 -(2, 3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-2- propanyljoctanamide (eliglustat), and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • An example of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat which may be employed is eliglustat tartrate.
  • the SERCA antagonist is selected from curcumin, thapsigargin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
  • the SERCA antagonist is selected from curcumin, thapsigargin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-[(lR,2R)-l-(2,3-Dihydro- l,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)-l-hydroxy-3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat.
  • eliglustat tartrate eliglustat tartrate
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-[(lR,2R)-l-(2,3-Dihydro-l,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)-l- hydroxy-3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat.
  • An example of a preferred pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat is eliglustat tartrate.
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of
  • glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), N- butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • NB-DNJ N-butyldeoxynojirimycin
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed in the present invention is an iminosugar
  • the iminosugar is typically a compound of formula (la) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
  • X is NR 5 ; n is 1; Y is CHR 6 ; R 11 is H;
  • R 1 and R 4 which may be the same or different, are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, substituted or unsubstituted C 1-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 1-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted C 1-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, C 1-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, provided that one of R 1 and R 4 may form, together with R 5 , a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene;
  • R 2 and R 3 which may be the same or different, are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted -O-Ci-20 alkylene- C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene; and
  • R 5 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted
  • R 6 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, amino, substituted or
  • Ci-20 alkoxy substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl.
  • R 1 , R 4 or R 5 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl
  • the Ci-20 alkylene is interrtupted once by O and the C3-25 cycloalkyl is
  • R 1 , R 4 or R 5 is -(Ci-10 alkylene)-0-CH2-Adamantyl. This includes, for instance, -(CH2)5-0-CH2-Adamantyl.
  • R 2 or R 3 when R 2 or R 3 is substituted or unsubstituted -O-Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, the Ci-20 alkylene is often interrtupted once by O and the C3-25 cycloalkyl is Adamantyl, and thus the R 2 or R 3 is -0-(Ci-io alkylene)-0-CH2- Adamantyl. This includes, for instance, -0-(CH2)5-0-CH2-Adamantyl.
  • the iminosugar may for instance be selected from:
  • N-butyldeoxynojirimycin also known as miglustat or ZAVESCA®; N- nonyldeoxynojirimycin (NN-DNJ); N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ); N-5- adamantane-l-yl-methoxypentyl-deoxynojirimycin (AMP-DNJ); alpha- homogalactonojirimycin (HGJ); Nojirimycin (NJ); Deoxynojirimycin (DNJ); N7- oxadecyl-deoxynojirimycin; deoxygalactonojirimycin (DGJ); N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ); N-nonyl-deoxygalactonojirimycin (NN-DGJ); N- nonyl-6deoxygalactonojirimycin; N7-oxanonyl-6deoxy-DGJ; alpha- ho moallon
  • MDL25874 l,5-dideoxy-l,5-imino-D-glucitol, and their N-alkyl, N-acyl and N-aryl, and optionally O-acylated derivatives; l,5-(Methylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; 1,5- (Hexylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(Nonylylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(2- Ethylbutylimino)- 1 ,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; 1 ,5-(2-Methylpentylimino)- 1 ,5-dideoxy-D- glucitol; l,5-(Benzyloxycarbonylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1,5-
  • the iminosugar is preferably however selected from N-butyldeoxynoj irimy cin (NB-DNJ), N-butyldeoxygalactonoj irimy cin (NB-DGJ), ido-N-(5-adamantane-l-yl- methoxy-pentyl)deoxynoj irimy cin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-L-ido- deoxynoj irimy cin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-D-galacto-deoxynoj irimy cin; C 1 - beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-methyl-C 1 -beta- (adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypent
  • the iminosugar is N-butyldeoxynoj irimy cin (NB-DNJ) or N-butyldeoxygalactonoj irimy cin (NB-DGJ).
  • the iminosugar is N-butyldeoxynoj irimy cin (NB-DNJ), which is also known as miglustat and ZAVESCA®.
  • NB-DNJ N-butyldeoxynoj irimy cin
  • NB-DGJ may also be preferred, however, due to its advantageous side effect profile.
  • the iminosugar is NB-DGJ.
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis;
  • the SERCA antagonist employed is selected from: curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof;
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed is selected from an iminosugar, D,L- threo- 1 -phenyl-2-decanoylamino-3 -morpholino- 1 -propanol (PDMP); D,L-threo- 1 -phenyl-2- hexadecanoylamino-3 -morpholino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo-l-phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3- pyrrolidino-1 -propanol (P4); 4'-hydroxy-D-threo-l-phenyl-2-palmitoilamin
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by
  • the SERCA antagonist employed is selected from: curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed is selected from an iminosugar, N-[(1R,2R)- 1 -(2,3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)- 2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • the infection by a pathogenic organism for instance, in one preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic organism.
  • mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis;
  • the SERCA antagonist is selected from curcumin, thapsigargin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof;
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or eliglustat or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar or eliglustat.
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis;
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof;
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis;
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof;
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is eliglustat or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat may be eliglustat tartrate.
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by
  • the SERCA antagonist is selected from curcumin, thapsigargin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by
  • Mycobacterium tuberculosis the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N- butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • NB-DNJ N-butyldeoxynojirimycin
  • NB-DGJ N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin
  • the infection by a pathogenic organism by a pathogenic organism.
  • mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis;
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a
  • NB-DGJ N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin
  • the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis;
  • the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof;
  • the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the present invention provides a combination comprising curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, which combination is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
  • NB-DNJ N-butyldeoxynojirimycin
  • the invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, which composition is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by NB-DNJ.
  • NB-DNJ N-butyldeoxynojirimycin
  • the invention also provides curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with N- butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • NB-DNJ N- butyldeoxynojirimycin
  • the invention also provides N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a
  • the invention also provides a method of treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, which method comprises administering to a human or animal patient in need of such treatment an effective amount of curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and an effective amount of N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • NB-DNJ N-butyldeoxynojirimycin
  • said patient is human.
  • the invention also provides a kit of parts comprising curcumin or a
  • NB- DNJ N-butyldeoxynojirimycin
  • said patient is human.
  • the invention also provides a kit of parts comprising N-butyldeoxynojirimycin
  • NB-DNJ a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
  • said patient is human.
  • the invention also provides a kit of parts comprising N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and instructions for their simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
  • NB-DNJ N-butyldeoxynojirimycin
  • said patient is human.
  • Administration details are provided.
  • the active compounds employed in the method of the invention i.e. the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, may be administered together in the same pharmaceutical composition. Alternatively, they may be administered in different compositions, and the different compositions may be administered separately, simultaneously, concomitantly or sequentially, and by the same route or by a different route.
  • the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis can be administered in a variety of dosage forms, for example orally such as in the form of tablets, capsules, sugar- or film-coated tablets, liquid solutions or suspensions or parenterally, for example intramuscularly, intravenously or subcutaneously.
  • dosage forms for example orally such as in the form of tablets, capsules, sugar- or film-coated tablets, liquid solutions or suspensions or parenterally, for example intramuscularly, intravenously or subcutaneously.
  • the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis may be presented for administration in a liposome.
  • either or both compounds may be encapsulated or entrapped in a liposome and then administered to the patient to be treated.
  • Active ingredients encapsulated by liposomes may reduce toxicity, increase efficacy, or both.
  • liposomes are thought to interact with cells by stable absorption, endocytosis, lipid transfer, and fusion (R.B. Egerdie et al., 1989, J. Urol. 142:390).
  • the dosages of the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis may be the same or different from one another and depend on a variety of factors including the age, weight and condition of the patient and the route of
  • the dosage of the SERCA antagonist, adopted for each route of administration, when the compound is coadministered with the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis to adult humans is 0.0001 to 50 mg/kg, most commonly in the range of 0.001 to 10 mg/kg, body weight, for instance 0.01 to 1 mg/kg. Such a dosage may be given, for example, from 1 to 5 times daily.
  • a suitable daily dose is from 0.0001 to 1 mg/kg body weight, preferably from 0.0001 to 0.1 mg/kg body weight.
  • a daily dosage can be administered as a single dosage or according to a divided dose schedule.
  • the dosage of the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis adopted for each route of administration, when the compound is co-administered with the SERCA antagonist to adult humans, is typically 0.0001 to 50 mg/kg, most commonly in the range of 0.001 to 10 mg/kg, body weight, for instance 0.01 to 1 mg/kg. Such a dosage may be given, for example, from 1 to 5 times daily.
  • a suitable daily dose is from 0.0001 to 1 mg/kg body weight, preferably from 0.0001 to 0.1 mg/kg body weight.
  • a daily dosage can be administered as a single dosage or according to a divided dose schedule.
  • each active agent i.e. the dose of the SERCA antagonist and the dose of the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis
  • the doses of each active agent range from about 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg of the compound, more typically from about 10 mg to about 1000 mg of the compound.
  • a typical dose may be about 100 mg to about 300 mg of the compound.
  • a dose may be administered once a day (QID), twice per day (BID), or more frequently, depending on the pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic properties, including absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion of the particular compound.
  • toxicity factors may influence the dosage and administration regimen.
  • the pill, capsule, or tablet may be ingested daily or less frequently for a specified period of time. The regimen may be repeated for a number of cycles of therapy.
  • the proportions in which (a) the SERCA antagonist and (b) the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis may be used according to the invention are variable. Active substances (a) and (b) may possibly be present in the form of their solvates or hydrates, or in any of various salt forms. Depending on the choice of the compounds (a) and (b), and the forms of those compounds (e.g. salt form, solvated, hydrated), the weight ratios which may be used within the scope of the present invention vary on the basis of the different molecular weights.
  • the pharmaceutical combinations according to the invention may for instance contain (a) and (b) generally in a ratio by weight (b):(a) ranging from 1 : 500 to 500: 1, preferably from 1 : 100 to 100: 1, for instance from 1 : 10 to 10: 1.
  • the SERCA antagonist and/or the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis compound may be formulated for use as a pharmaceutical composition also comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent. Such compositions are typically prepared following conventional methods and are administered in a pharmaceutically suitable form.
  • the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis may be administered together in the same pharmaceutical composition. Alternatively, they may be administered in different compositions, and the different compositions may be
  • either or both compounds may be administered separately, simultaneously, concomitantly or sequentially, and by the same route or by a different route.
  • either or both compounds may be administered in any conventional form and route, for instance as follows:
  • compositions intended for oral use may be prepared according to any method known in the art for the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions and such compositions may contain one or more agents selected from the group consisting of sweetening agents, flavouring agents, colouring agents and preserving agents in order to provide pharmaceutically elegant and palatable preparations.
  • Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipients which are suitable for the manufacture of tablets.
  • excipients may be for example, inert diluents, such as calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, dextrose, saccharose, cellulose, corn starch, potato starch, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate; granulating and disintegrating agents, for example, maize starch, alginic acid, alginates or sodium starch glycolate; binding agents, for example starch, gelatin or acacia; lubricating agents, for example silica, magnesium or calcium stearate, stearic acid or talc; effervescing mixtures; dyestuffs, sweeteners, wetting agents such as lecithin, polysorbates or lauryl sulphate.
  • inert diluents such as calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, dextrose, saccharose, cellulose
  • the tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period.
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Such preparations may be manufactured in a known manner, for example by means of mixing, granulating, tableting, sugar coating or film coating processes.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is present as such, or mixed with water or an oil medium, for example, peanut oil, liquid paraffin, or olive oil.
  • an inert solid diluent for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • water or an oil medium for example, peanut oil, liquid paraffin, or olive oil.
  • Aqueous suspensions contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions.
  • excipients are suspending agents, for example, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose,
  • dispersing or wetting agents may be naturally-occurring phosphatides, for example lecithin, or condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids, for example polyoxyethylene stearate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols, for example heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides for example polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.
  • phosphatides for example lecithin
  • condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids for example polyoxyethylene stearate
  • condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols for example heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol
  • the said aqueous suspensions may also contain one or more preservatives, for example, ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more colouring agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • preservatives for example, ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate
  • colouring agents such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oily suspension may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient in a vegetable oil, for example arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil, or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin.
  • the oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent, for example beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol.
  • Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and flavouring agents may be added to provide a palatable oral preparation. These compositions may be preserved by this addition of an antioxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, for example sweetening, flavouring and colouring agents, may also be present.
  • compositions for use in accordance with the invention may also be in the form of oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase may be a vegetable oil, for example olive oil or arachis oils, or a mineral oil, for example liquid paraffin or mixtures of these.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents may be naturally-occurring gums, for example gum acacia or gum tragacanth, naturally occuring phosphatides, for example soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids an hexitol anhydrides, for example sorbitan monooleate, and condensation products of the said partial esters with ethylene oxide, for example polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.
  • the emulsion may also contain sweetening and flavouring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, for example glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose.
  • a syrup for diabetic patients can contain as carriers only products, for example sorbitol, which do not metabolise to glucose or which only metabolise a very small amount to glucose.
  • Such formulations may also contain a demulcent, a preservative and flavouring and coloring agents;
  • sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions This suspension may be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing of wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic paternally-acceptable diluent or solvent, for example as a solution in 1,3 -butane diol.
  • sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectables;
  • a suitable non-irritating excipient which is solid at ordinary temperature but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug.
  • Such materials are cocoa butter and poly-ethylene glycols
  • RAW 264.7 macrophages were obtained from the European Cell Culture Collection (Porton Down, UK). Primary mouse macrophages were isolated from adult (8 week old) mice and cultured at 37°C with 5% C0 2 in RPMI with 10% foetal calf serum (FCS), 1% penicillin/streptomycin and 1% L-glutamine (Lonza, Basel, Switzerland). Mtb (H37Rv strain) and M. bovis BCG (Pasteur strain) were kindly provided by Simon Clark and Dominic Kelly. Fluorescent M smegmatis (mc 2 155 strain expressing mCherry) was provided by David Russell.
  • Mycobacteria were grown on 7H11 agar plates (supplemented with Oleic Albumin Dextrose Catalase) before transfer to 7H9 liquid media (supplemented with Albumin Dextrose Catalase).
  • PCl-overexpressing Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells (Millard, E. E., et al. J Biol Chem 275, 38445-38451, doi: 10.1074/jbc.M003180200 M003180200 [pii], 2000) were grown at 37°C with 5% C0 2 in DMEM-F12 with 10% FCS, 1%) penicillin/streptomycin and 1% glutamine.
  • U18666A was used at a concentration of ⁇ g/ml for 48 hours.
  • Peripheral blood CD14 + monocytes were isolated using microbeads (Miltenyi Biotec) according to manufacturer's instructions, differentiated in the presence of M-CSF (lOng/ml) in X-vivo media (Lonza) and used after 7 days.
  • FLUOS labelling of mycobacteria A volume (5ml) of a mid-exponential (OD 6 oo 0.8 - 1.2) mycobacteria culture was centrifuged, resuspended in 500 ⁇ 1 of HEPES buffer (pH 9.1) and labelled with 25 ⁇ 1 of 20mg/ml FLUOS (5(6)-carboxyfluorescein-N- hydroxysuccinimideester) in DMSO. Bacteria were washed twice with warm 7H9 (37°C) and resuspended in 500 ⁇ 1 of RPMI-FCS. The OD 6 oo of the solution was measured and the concentration of bacteria determined.
  • BCG was electroporated with pVl 16 plasmid containing gene for mCherry using standard parameters. Transformed colonies were selected on 7H11 OADC agar plates. Individual colonies were picked and grown in liquid culture.
  • Host Cell Infection Unless otherwise stated infections were carried out at a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 12.5. Host cells were plated out approximately 18h prior to infection. A volume of mid-exponential mycobacteria was centrifuged and resuspended in
  • lipids and mycolic acid methyl-esters were extracted from bovis.
  • a 100ml culture of bacteria was grown to an absorbance of 1.0 at OD 6 oo, centrifuged and the bacteria were resuspended in 5ml PBS. This was transferred to an 8.5ml screw top glass culture tube and centrifuged prior to removal of supernatant and drying of pellet overnight at room temperature.
  • the desiccated bacterial pellet was incubated with 2ml of 5% aqueous tetrabutylammonium hydroxide at 100°C for 16h.
  • the sample was cooled and ⁇ of methyl iodide, 4ml dichlorom ethane and 2ml H 2 0 added.
  • the sample was mixed for 30min and the lower organic layer removed, washed with 3x5ml H 2 0 and dried under nitrogen.
  • the dried extract was re-suspended in 1ml diethyl ether, mixed for 60min and centrifuged at 3,000 x g for 5min. The supernatant was removed, pellet dried under nitrogen and then
  • Lipids were visualized by spraying plates either with 5% ethanolic molybdophosphoric acid and charring, a-naphthol/sulfuric acid followed by gentle charring of plates for glycolipids, a Dittmer and Lester reagent which is specific for phospholipids and glycophospholipids or using ninhydrin, a amino specific reagent for detecting amino residues on extracted lipids (Tatituri, R. V. et al. J Biol Chem 282, 4561- 4572, doi: 10.1074/jbc.M608695200, 2007; Dobson, G. et al. in Chemical Methods in Bacterial Systematics (eds M. Goodfellow & D.E. Minnikin) 237-265 (Academic Press, 1985)).
  • the glycolate mycolate fraction was further purified by either using silica gel packed into glass columns or by preparative TLC. In the silica gel procedure, mycolate fraction was dissolved in 100% CHCI3 and initially eluted with CHCI3/CH3OH (80: 1, v/v) and further eluted with decreasing concentration of CHCI3 but keeping the CH3OH constant. The glycomycolate fractions were monitored by TLC on a 10 cm x 10 cm aluminum backed TLC plates of silica gel 60 F254 (Merck
  • Fluorescein-dextran and Rhodamine-dextran (Sigma) were loaded at 0.25mg/ml for 12h into cells at 37°C followed by 12h chase at 37°C to label lysosomes. Image analysis and quantification of fluorescence was performed using SimplePCI software.
  • Cells were mounted on the stage of an Olympus 1X71 microscope equipped with a 40 UApo/340 objective (1.35 NA) and a 12-bit Photometries Coolsnap HQ2 CCD camera. Cells were excited alternately by 350-and 380-nm light using a Cairn monochromator; emission data were collected at 480-540 nm using a bandpass filter. Experiments were conducted at room temperature with an image collected every 2-3 s. Lysosomal Ca 2+ content was assessed upon addition of 200 mM GPN (Santa Cruz Biotechnology) which lyses Cathepsin- containing acidic intracellular Ca 2+ stores.
  • LysoTracker Green D D-26 (100 nM for 5 min at room temperature) in a buffer containing (mM): 121 NaCl, 5.4 KC1, 0.8 MgCl 2 , 1.8 CaCl 2 , 6 NaHCOs, 25 HEPES, 10 Glucose).
  • the cells were washed once in the same buffer but without Ca 2+ (Ca 2+ -free buffer) and supplemented with 1 mM EGTA. The cells were then washed twice with Ca 2+ - free buffer containing 100 ⁇ EGTA and subsequent experiments conducted in this buffer.
  • the cells were mounted on the stage of a Zeiss LSM510 Meta confocal laser- scanning microscope equipped with a 40x objective; excitation/emission (nm): green (488/505-530), red (543/>560). Experiments were conducted at room temperature with an image collected every 1 s.
  • the activity of Cathepsin C was inferred from the release of LysoTracker (i.e. a decrease in fluorescence) from lysosomes upon the addition of the lysosome-disrupting cathepsin C substrate, Glycyl-L-phenylalanine 2-naphthylamide (GPN, 200 ⁇ ). Images were analysed using custom-written Magipix software (R.
  • Cholesterol measurement Cholesterol and cholesterol esters were quantified using the Amplex Red Molecular Probes kit, according to manufacturers instructions. Cellular cholesterol was visualised using filipin (Polysciences, Warrington PA, USA) (Lloyd- Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii]10.1038/ nm.1876, 2008).
  • Sphingomyelin measurement Intracellular sphingomyelin was visualised using Lysenin (Peptides International, Inc., Louisville KY, USA) as described (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] l 0.1038/ nm.1876, 2008).
  • CtxB Cholera toxin B subunit
  • Lysotracker staining Cells were live stained with 50nM Lysotracker green (Molecular Probes) in PBS at room temperature for 30 min prior to washing.
  • BODIPY-LacCer was used at a concentration of 5 ⁇ .
  • M. smegmatis Host cells on coverslips were infected with M smegmatis (MOI 12.5) and incubated at 37°C/5% C0 2 for 2h. Cells were washed, and incubated at 37°C/5% C0 2 with fresh medium. At stated time points coverslips were washed, PFA fixed, and M. smegmatis clearance quantified via microscopy.
  • Pellets were then washed 3 x with 0.1M cacodylate, treated with a solution of 0.1M glycine for 45min before post fixation in 1% osmium tetroxide for 2h, followed by cacodylate and maleate buffer washes, further post fixation and staining with 1% uranyl acetate in maleate buffer for lh in the dark. They were then washed with maleate buffer and dehydrated through an ascending series of ice-cold ethanol up to 100% ethanol, followed by three changes of dry ethanol at room temperature, three changes of propylene oxide, and infiltration with a 1 : 1 araldite: propylene oxide for 1.5h.
  • Propylene oxide was blown off, pellets embedded in resin and maintained at 60°C for 3 days prior to sectioning.
  • Npc 1'1' mice were PBS perfused, followed by perfusion with a mixture containing 4% PFA, 15% picric acid, and 0.5% GA in 0.1M cacodylate buffer for 20min. Liver was removed, sectioned, and fixed a solution of 2%PFA, 2.5% GA, 2mM calcium chloride and 0.1% picric acid in 0.1M cacodylate buffer on ice for 2h, prior to incubation overnight. Samples were then fixed at room temperature for 6h, returned to 4°C overnight, washed with cacodylate buffer and transferred to antifreeze and allowed to sink overnight.
  • NPC cells display a unique combination of cellular phenotypes that include storage of sphingomyelin, GSLs and sphingosine, mistrafficking of GSLs from the Golgi recycling- pathway to LE/Lys (Chen, C. S., Patterson, M. C, Wheatley, C. L., O'Brien, J. F. & Pagano, R. E. Broad screening test for sphingolipid-storage diseases. Lancet 354, 901-905; 1999) and reduced luminal LE/Lys Ca 2+ storage and impaired LE/Lys Ca2 + release (Lloyd- Evans, E. & Piatt, F. M. Traffic 11, 419-428, doi:TRA1032 [pii]
  • the murine macrophage cell line RAW 264.7 was infected with live BCG (Pasteur strain), an attenuated form oi Mycobacterium bovis, which is a widely studied model of early stage Mtb infection.
  • BCG Panethyl-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876
  • BCG infected macrophages exhibited elevated sphingosine levels relative to uninfected cells 48 hours post-infection (Fig. lA,p ⁇ 0.05). Infected macrophages also exhibited reduced LE/Lys Ca 2+ , as assessed indirectly by discharging their Ca 2+ content with the lysomotropic agent glycyl-L-phenylalanine- -napthylamide (GPN) (an agent that induces osmotic lysis upon hydrolysis by Cathepsin C) (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm.
  • GPN glycyl-L-phenylalanine- -napthylamide
  • NPC phenotype is elevated GSLs.
  • Total GSL levels were significantly elevated by 48 hours (Fig. ID, p ⁇ 0.05).
  • Accumulation of lactosylceramide (LacCer) which occurs in NPC cells and in tissues of Npcl '1' mice was not detected at 24 and 48 hours post-infection (BCG-infected RAW 264.7 cells) but was significantly elevated 7 days post-infection (Fig. 2A p ⁇ 0.01).
  • the most widely recognised cellular hallmark of NPC cells is the storage of cholesterol within LE/Lys (Vanier, M. T. Niemann- Pick disease type C. Orphanet J Rare Dis 5, 16, doi: l 0.1186/1750- 1172-5- 16 (2010);
  • NPC neurotrophic factor
  • Fig. 3Ai fluorescently conjugated cholera toxin subunit B and lysenin that measure the storage and mislocalisation (altered trafficking) of GM1 ganglioside
  • Fig. 3AHii fluorescently conjugated cholera toxin subunit B and lysenin that measure the storage and mislocalisation (altered trafficking) of GM1 ganglioside
  • Fig. 3AHii sphingomyelin
  • monocyte- derived macrophages from healthy donors were infected with BCG.
  • reduced LE/Lys Ca 2+ levels indirectly assayed by GPN-evoked Ca 2+ release (Fig. 3D) and elevated GSLs (Fig. 4A) were observed.
  • cholesterol storage in LE/Lys was also detected in BCG-infected human macrophages (and in non- infected neighbouring cells) (Fig. 4Bi), accompanied by mistrafficking of GM1 ganglioside (Fig. 4Bii).
  • Mycobacterial cell wall lipids induce NPC phenotypes in the absence of live mycobacteria
  • the inventors prepared chloroform: methanol-extracted BCG lipids and found that this fraction induced accumulation/re- distribution of cholesterol (Fig 5Ai), mistrafficking of GM1 ganglioside (Fig 5Aii) and accumulation/re-distribution of sphingomyelin (Fig 5Aiii) in uninfected RAW 264.7 macrophages, comparable to the NPC phenotypes induced by live mycobacteria.
  • the heat- treated preparation had the same ability to affect GM1 ganglioside distribution as the non- heat-treated fraction, suggesting that the NPC phenotype-inducing agent was a lipid and not proteinaceous (Fig. 5B).
  • 3 ⁇ 4-derived mycolic acids (the major cell wall-derived class of lipids in Mtb) also induced NPC phenotypes, including storage of cholesterol and sphingomyelin in RAW 246.7 macrophages, (Fig. 5Ci and ii) and cholesterol storage and GM1 mistrafficking in primary human macrophages (Fig. 6Ai and ii).
  • TDM glucose monomycolate
  • GMM glucose monomycolate
  • TDM from bovis also recapitulated PC phenotypes in terms of reduced LE/Lys Ca 2+ levels (Fig 7i and ii respectively), cholesterol storage and GM1 mi straffi eking (Fig. 8i and ii respectively) and GSL accumulation (Fig. 9).
  • t e Mtb lipid TDM reproduces the NPC phenotype caused by pathogenic mycobacteria.
  • Mycobacteria target the NPCl protein
  • NPCl mice lacking one NPCl allele would be more susceptible to inhibition than wild-type cells.
  • Bone marrow-derived macrophages generated from NPCl heterozygous mice ⁇ Npcl +I ⁇ were therefore incubated with TDM. It was observed that cells with 50% of wild-type NPCl protein levels were indeed more susceptible to inhibition (Fig 10A). These data were complemented by the demonstration that CHO cells overexpressing NPCl were more resistant to induction of NPC cellular phenotypes than wild-type cells when exposed to TDM.
  • NPCl overexpression was proportional to the resistance to phenotype induction; cells over- expressing NPCl by 15-fold were more resistant than those over-expressing NPCl 5-fold (Fig. 10B).
  • the proteins' expression levels in RAW264.7 cells infected with BCG were examined. Whereas expression of NPCl protein was up regulated in infected cells, there were no changes in NPC2 levels (Fig. 11).
  • NPC patient cells that lack functional NPCl due to a genetic defect will not be able to clear even non-pathogenic mycobacteria as they have impaired LE/Lys fusion.
  • Non-pathogenic mycobacterial species normally cannot inhibit phagosome-lysosome fusion (they may lack inhibitory lipids) and are readily cleared by healthy cells.
  • NPC therapeutics promote clearance of pathogenic mycobacteria via a Ca 2+ - dependent mechanism.
  • pharmacologically manipulating other Ca 2+ stores can compensate for the defect in LE/Lys Ca 2+ release and correct the NPC phenotypes (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii]10.1038/nm. l876; 2008).
  • Curcumin inhibits Ca 2+ uptake by the sarco-endoplasmic reticulum Ca 2+ -ATPase (SERCA) (Bilmen, J. G., et al. Eur J Biochem 268, 6318-6327, doi:2589 [pii]; 2001) and thereby causes Ca 2+ leak from the ER.
  • SERCA sarco-endoplasmic reticulum Ca 2+ -ATPase
  • bovis BCG bovis BCG (Fig. 15).
  • curcumin showed synergy. No such synergy was seen when curcumin and cyclodextrin were used in combination. Curcumin also significantly reduced mycobacterial burden in infected primary human macrophages (Fig. 17, p ⁇ 0.05).
  • curcuminoids have previously been reported to have direct anti-Mtb activity in host-cell free systems, the slow kinetics of such an anti-bacterial action cannot account for the relatively rapid effects that the inventors observed: it took >4 days for high- purity curcumin to reduce BCG growth in broth. In view of the differences in time scale, it seems likely that the enhanced clearance observed here (Figs. 16-19) results from curcumin modulating intracellular Ca 2+ . Discussion
  • Mtb inhibits the NPC pathway, promoting its intra-cellular survival in host macrophages. This link between this rare lysosomal storage disorder and Mtb infection has several important implications for understanding host-pathogen interactions and for developing new therapies to combat TB, particularly in the current era of antibiotic resistance.
  • Phagocytosed Mtb bacilli undergo a period of rapid multiplication, concomitant with granuloma development (Russell, D. G., et al. Nat Immunol 10, 943-948,
  • a significant element of the mycobacterial intracellular survival strategy is its ability to inhibit phagosome-lysosome fusion, thereby avoiding lysosomal destruction.
  • pathogenic mycobacteria such as Mtb and BCG
  • secrete lipids that inhibit the NPC pathway, phenocopying NPCl 7" cells.
  • the NPC phenotypes induced in host cells include elevated levels of sphingosine, which in turn inhibits LE/Lys Ca 2 store filling (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] 10.1038/nm. l876; 2008), leading to reduce phagosome-lysosome fusion facilitating intracellular mycobacterial survival.
  • TDM also known as cord factor
  • TDM TDM-derived neurotrophic factor
  • mycobacteria possessing lower levels of this lipid have reduced virulence and an impaired capacity to modulate endocytic trafficking and phagosome maturation (Katti, M. K. et al. Cellular microbiology 10, 1286-1303, doi: 10.1111/j. l462-5822.2008.01126.x, 2008;
  • NPCl is a mammalian orthologue of an ancient family of bacterial transporters termed Root
  • NPCl as the potential target for inhibitory lipids shed by pathogenic mycobacteria.
  • the susceptibility of cells to the induction of NPC phenotypes was dependent upon the relative levels of the NPCl protein; Npcl +I ⁇ macrophages were more sensitive than wild type whilst
  • NPCl but not NPC2
  • This upregulation may act to slow the rate of induction of NPC disease cellular phenotypes by the mycobacterium as the inventors saw in the over NPCl overexpressing cells.
  • the enhanced copy number of NPCl protein will still be subject to inhibition by mycobacterial lipids, so cannot prevent the development of stable infection over time.
  • NPC 1 significantly enhanced the survival of non-pathogenic mycobacterial species. This may have significant implications for NPC patients as it would suggest that they are likely to have altered microbial handling, and as a result harbour an unusual microbiome, and potentially have greater susceptibly to Mtb infection.
  • the inventors reasoned that should inhibition of the NPC pathway be central to the intracellular survival of pathogenic mycobacteria, pharmacological agents that correct NPC cells should promote clearance of the mycobacterium. Consistent with this hypothesis, a significantly lower bacterial load was measured in cells treated with curcumin, a natural product that raises cytosolic [Ca 2+ ], but not in those exposed to the curcumin analogue (FLLL31) that has no effect on cytosolic Ca 2+ levels. The inventors investigated whether two other drugs that have shown efficacy in NPC might also promote elimination of mycobacteria. However, enhanced microbial clearance was not detected when either ⁇ -cyclodextrin (which can ameliorate disease symptoms in animal models (Davidson, C. D.
  • the inventors have demonstrated for the first time a mechanistic relationship between a rare, inherited fatal neurodegenerative lysosomal disorder and the process used by the most successful human intracellular pathogen to subvert cellular defences.
  • These findings provide not only an explanation for the defective phagosomal maturation observed following Mtb infection, but also provide a unified mechanistic framework accounting for other unexplained phenotypes in Mtb infected macrophages, including cholesterol (Peyron, P. et al. PLoS Pathog 4, el000204, doi: 10.1371/journal.ppat.1000204, 2008) and LacCer storage (Kim, M. J. et al.
  • inhibitors of sphingolipid biosynthesis and ⁇ -cyclodextrin were found to be inactive, in that neither class of agent promoted mycobacterial clearance when used alone over the time course used, it was unexpectedly found that inhibitors of sphingolipid biosynthesis show synergy when combined with compounds that elevate cytosolic calcium. Indeed, the combination of curcumin, a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium, and miglustat, an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, showed significantly greater efficacy than the calcium modulator on its own and, of course, than the inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis on its own which showed no activity.
  • the invention therefore provides a surprisingly efficacious combination therapy for treating infections by pathogenic mycobacteria, and in particular infections by Mtb, which employs a compound that elevates cytosolic calcium in combination with an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis.
  • Tablets each weighing 0.15 g and containing 12.5 mg of a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and 12.5 mg of an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in accordance with the invention, are manufactured as follows:
  • the active compounds (a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis), lactose and half of the corn starch are mixed. The mixture is then forced through a sieve 0.5 mm mesh size.
  • Corn starch (10 g) is suspended in warm water (90 ml). The resulting paste is used to granulate the powder. The granulate is dried and broken up into small fragments on a sieve of 1.4 mm mesh size. The remaining quantity of starch, talc and magnesium is added, carefully mixed and processed into tablets.
  • the two active compounds a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in accordance with the invention, are dissolved in most of the water (35° 40° C) and the pH adjusted to between 4.0 and 7.0 with the hydrochloric acid or the sodium hydroxide as appropriate.
  • the batch is then made up to volume with water and filtered through a sterile micropore filter into a sterile 10 ml amber glass vial (type 1) and sealed with sterile closures and overseals.
  • the two active compounds a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in accordance with the invention, are dissolved in the glycofurol.
  • the benzyl alcohol is then added and dissolved, and water added to 3 ml.
  • the mixture is then filtered through a sterile micropore filter and sealed in sterile 3 ml glass vials (type 1).
  • the two active compounds a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in accordance with the invention, are dissolved in a mixture of the glycerol and most of the purified water. An aqueous solution of the sodium benzoate is then added to the solution, followed by addition of the sorbitol solution and finally the flavour. The volume is made up with purified water and mixed well.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)

Abstract

The invention provides provides a combination comprising a SERCA antagonist and an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium. The combination may for instance be used to treat tuberculosis.

Description

TREATMENT OF MYCOBACTERIAL INFECTION
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium, and in particular to the treatment of tuberculosis.
BACKGROUND TO THE INVENTION
Approximately one-third of the world's population is infected with Mycobacterium tuberculosis (Mtb), the causative agent of human tuberculosis (TB). TB causes around 2 million deaths per year, a significant number of which are immune-compromised individuals (Gray, J. M. & Cohn, D. L. Tuberculosis and HIV coinfection. Seminars in respiratory and critical care medicine 34, 32-43, doi: 10.1055/s-0032-1333469; 2013). The only approved vaccine, Bacillus Calmette-Guerin (BCG) has limited efficacy (Evans, T. G., Brennan, M. J., Barker, L. & Thole, J. Preventive vaccines for tuberculosis. Vaccine 31 Suppl 2, B223-226, doi: 10.1016/j.vaccine.2012.11.081; 2013) and the emergence of antibiotic-resistant TB strains has led to a reduction in available therapeutic options.
Consequently the development of new TB therapies is of paramount importance.
Mtb (and the model organism BCG) have the unusual ability to invade, persist and replicate within cells of the innate immune system, particularly alveolar macrophages (Russell, D. G., Cardona, P. J., Kim, M. J., Allain, S. & Altare, F. Foamy macrophages and the progression of the human tuberculosis granuloma. Nat Immunol 10, 943-948, doi: 10.1038/ni. l781; 2009). ¾-infected cells develop a characteristic cholesterol-laden foamy cell phenotype (Peyron, P. et al. Foamy macrophages from tuberculous patients' granulomas constitute a nutrient-rich reservoir for M. tuberculosis persistence. PLoS Pathog 4, el000204, doi: 10.1371/journal.ppat. l000204; 2008) and have evolved the unusual ability to metabolise host cholesterol as a carbon source (Lack, N. A. et al.
Characterization of a carbon-carbon hydrolase from Mycobacterium tuberculosis involved in cholesterol metabolism. J Biol Chem 285, 434-443, doi: 10.1074/jbc.M109.058081; 2010; Pandey, A. K. & Sassetti, C. M. Mycobacterial persistence requires the utilization of host cholesterol. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 105, 4376-4380, doi: 10.1073/
pnas.0711159105; 2008; Thomas, S. T., VanderVen, B. C, Sherman, D. R., Russell, D. G. & Sampson, N. S. Pathway profiling in Mycobacterium tuberculosis: elucidation of cholesterol-derived catabolite and enzymes that catalyze its metabolism. J Biol Chem 286, 43668-43678, doi: 10.1074/jbc.Ml l 1.313643; 2011). Non-pathogenic mycobacteria, including Mycobacterium smegmatis, bind host cell-surface receptors and are ingested into phagosomes that subsequently mature and fuse with lysosomes, leading to destruction of the mycobacterium. In contrast, pathogenic mycobacteria are not delivered to the lysosome due to the mycobacterium inhibiting phagosome-lysosome fusion. Multiple mechanisms have been proposed to explain this, including phagosome maturation arrest (Jayachandran, R. et al. Survival of mycobacteria in macrophages is mediated by coronin 1 -dependent activation of calcineurin. Cell 130, 37-50, doi: 10.1016/j .cell.2007.04.043; 2007), defective acidification (Sturgill-Koszycki, S. et al. Lack of acidification in Mycobacterium phagosomes produced by exclusion of the vesicular proton- ATPase. Science 263, 678-681; 1994) and inhibition of phosphatidylinositol-dependent trafficking pathways (Vergne, L, Chua, J. & Deretic, V. Tuberculosis toxin blocking phagosome maturation inhibits a novel Ca2+/calmodulin-PI3K hVPS34 cascade. J Exp Med 198, 653-659,
doi: 10.1084/jem.20030527; 2003; Vergne, L, Chua, J. & Deretic, V. Mycobacterium tuberculosis phagosome maturation arrest: selective targeting of PI3P-dependent membrane trafficking. Traffic 4, 600-606; 2003). Calcium ions (Ca2+) have also been implicated, as phagosome-lysosome fusion is stimulated by an elevation of cytosolic Ca2+ (Majeed, M., Perskvist, N., Ernst, J. D., Orselius, K. & Stendahl, O. Roles of calcium and annexins in phagocytosis and elimination of an attenuated strain of Mycobacterium tuberculosis in human neutrophils. Microbial pathogenesis 24, 309-320,
doi: 10.1006/mpat.1997.0200; 1998). However, in ^-infected macrophages this Ca2+ elevation has been found to be reduced, thereby blocking phagosome-lysosome fusion and facilitating mycobacterial survival and long-term persistence (latency) (Majeed, M., Perskvist, N., Ernst, J. D., Orselius, K. & Stendahl, O. Roles of calcium and annexins in phagocytosis and elimination of an attenuated strain of Mycobacterium tuberculosis in human neutrophils. Microbial pathogenesis 24, 309-320, doi: 10.1006/mpat.1997.0200; 1998). However, another study concluded that phagosome-lysosome fusion is a Ca2+- independent process (Zimmerli, S. et al. Phagosome-lysosome fusion is a calcium- independent event in macrophages. The Journal of cell biology 132, 49-61; 1996).
Cholesterol storage and a failure in the fusion of late endosomes/lysosomes (LE/Lys) also occurs in the rare inherited neurodegenerative lysosomal storage disease, Niemann-Pick type C (NPC) (Vanier, M. T. Niemann-Pick disease type C. Orphanet J Rare Dis 5, 16, doi: 10.1186/1750- 1172-5- 16; 2010). NPC is caused by mutations in either of two genes, NPCl (95% of clinical cases) or NPC 2 (Vanier, M. T. Niemann-Pick disease type C. Orphanet J Rare Dis 5, 16, doi: 10.1186/1750-1172-5-16; 2010). The proteins they encode function in a common cell biological pathway (the NPC pathway) with defects in either gene resulting in identical clinical phenotypes. NPCl encodes NPCl, a multi- membrane-spanning protein that resides in of the limiting LE/Lys membrane (Davies, J. P., Chen, F. W. & Ioannou, Y. A. Transmembrane molecular pump activity of Niemann-Pick CI protein. Science 290, 2295-2298, doi: 10.1126/science.290.5500.2295 290/5500/2295 [pii]; 2000). In contrast, NPC2 is a soluble lysosomal cholesterol-binding protein
(Naureckiene, S. et al. Identification of HE1 as the second gene of Niemann-Pick C disease. Science 290, 2298-2301; 2000). It has been proposed that NPCl and NPC2 exchange cholesterol, although whether the pathway serves primarily to efflux cholesterol or is a cholesterol regulated/sensing pathway that effluxes other substrates remains unresolved (Lloyd-Evans, E. & Piatt, F. M. Lipids on trial: the search for the offending metabolite in Niemann-Pick type C disease. Traffic 11, 419-428, doi:TRA1032 [pii] 10.1111/j . l 600-0854.2010.01032.x; 2010). The sequence of events that culminates in NPC disease in cells following pharmacological inactivation of NPCl is an increase in the level of sphingosine in the LE/Lys. This is rapidly followed by decreased Ca2+ storage and Ca2+ release from the LE/Lys. This leads to downstream endocytic trafficking defects, failure in LE/Lys fusion (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Niemann-Pick disease type CI is a sphingosine storage disease that causes deregulation of lysosomal calcium. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] 10.1038/nm. l876; 2008; Morgan, A. J., Piatt, F. M., Lloyd- Evans, E. & Galione, A. Molecular mechanisms of endolysosomal Ca2+ signalling in health and disease. Biochem J 439, 349-374, doi:BJ20110949 [pii] 10.1042/BJ20110949; 2011) and the subsequent storage of cholesterol and glycosphingolipids in a distended endolysosomal compartment. In addition to storage of multiple lipids, NPC cells also accumulate autophagic vacuoles due to a failure in their clearance (Pacheco, C. D., Kunkel, R. & Lieberman, A. P. Autophagy in Niemann-Pick C disease is dependent upon Beclin-1 and responsive to lipid trafficking defects. Hum Mol Genet 16, 1495-1503, doi: 10.1093/hmg/ddml00; 2007; Settembre, C, Fraldi, A., Rubinsztein, D. C. & Ballabio, A. Lysosomal storage diseases as disorders of autophagy. Autophagy 4, 1 13-114, doi:5227 [pii]; 2008). Intriguingly, many of these NPC cellular phenotypes (Lloyd-Evans, E. & Piatt, F. M. Lipids on trial: the search for the offending metabolite in Niemann-Pick type C disease. Traffic 11, 419-428, doi:TRA1032 [pii] 10.1111/j . l 600-0854.2010.01032.x; 2010) are also observed in ¾-infected macrophages, including endocytic transport
abnormalities, defective autophagy, accumulation of free cholesterol, elevated levels of GSLs and the presence of lamellar storage bodies (Russell, D. G., Cardona, P. J., Kim, M. J., Allain, S. & Altare, F. Foamy macrophages and the progression of the human tuberculosis granuloma. Nat Immunol 10, 943-948, doi: 10.1038/ni. l781; 2009).
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The observations outlined above prompted the inventors to investigate whether there is a mechanistic link between pathogenic mycobacterial infection and the NPC pathway. The inventors unexpectedly found that pathogenic mycobacteria, including Mycobacterium tuberculosis, secrete lipids that inhibit the NPC pathway, promoting the intra-cellular survival of the mycobacteria in host macrophages. This link between the rare lysosomal storage disorder NPC and Mtb infection has important implications for understanding host-pathogen interactions and for developing new therapies to combat TB, particularly in the current era of antibiotic resistance. The inventors found that treatment with a particular class of pharmacological agent that corrects defects in NPCl mutant cells promotes mycobacterial clearance. In particular, SERCA antagonists, which inhibit Ca2+ uptake by the sarco-endoplasmic reticulum Ca2+-ATPase (SERCA), causing Ca2+to leak from the endoplasmic reticulum and cytosolic [Ca2+] to increase, were found to significantly lower bacterial load. Other classes of agent known to be useful against NPC disease, however, did not promote mycobacterial clearance. In particular, miglustat, which is an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid (GSL) biosynthesis that is clinically approved for treating NPC disease, did not by itself enhance mycobacterial clearance over the time course tested. Also, β-cyclodextrin, which ameliorates NPC disease symptoms in animal models, possibly via stimulation of exocytosis, was found not to promote mycobacterial clearance. Furthermore, a structural analog of curcumin that does not function as SERCA antagonist was found not to promote clearance of the mycobacterium. These data support that the lipids secreted by the pathogenic mycobacteria inhibit the NPC pathway to achieve altered acidic store calcium homeostasis, that in turn blocks the ability of the lysosome to fuse and kill the mycobacterium, leading to persistence.
Despite the fact that the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis and
cyclodextrin were found to be inactive, in that neither class of agent promoted
mycobacterial clearance over the time course, it was unexpectedly found that inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis show synergy when combined with a SERCA antagonist. Indeed, the combination of a SERCA antagonist (which elevates cytosolic calcium) and an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis showed significantly greater efficacy than the SERCA antagonist on its own and, of course, than the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis on its own which showed no activity. No such synergy was observed between β-cyclodextrin and SERCA antagonists. The invention therefore provides a surprisingly efficacious combination therapy for treating infections by pathogenic mycobacteria, and in particular infections by Mtb, which employs a SERCA antagonist in combination with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
Accordingly, the present invention provides a combination comprising a SERCA antagonist and an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, which combination is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
The active compounds in the combination, i.e. the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, may be administered together in the same pharmaceutical composition or in different compositions intended for separate,
simultaneous, concomitant or sequential administration by the same or a different route.
In one embodiment the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis are both present in the same pharmaceutical composition. Thus, the combination of the invention may comprise a pharmaceutical composition comprising the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis. The
pharmaceutical composition may further comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluents.
Accordingly, the invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a SERCA antagonist, an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, and a
pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, which composition is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
The invention also provides a SERCA antagonist, which SERCA antagonist is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
The invention also provides an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, which inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co- administration with a SERCA antagonist.
The invention also provides a method of treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium, which method comprises administering to a human or animal patient in need of such treatment an effective amount of a SERCA antagonist and an effective amount of an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis. The active compounds employed in the method of the invention, i.e. the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, may be administered together in the same pharmaceutical composition. Alternatively, they may be administered in different compositions, and the different compositions may be administered separately, simultaneously, concomitantly or sequentially, and by the same route or by a different route.
The invention also provides a kit of parts comprising a SERCA antagonist together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
The invention also provides a kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of
glycosphingolipid biosynthesis together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with a SERCA antagonist, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
The invention also provides a kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of
glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, a SERCA antagonist, and instructions for their
simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
Preferably said patient is human.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
Figure 1 A is a histogram showing that BCG infected macrophages exhibited elevated sphingosine levels relative to uninfected cells 48 hours post-infection.
Figure IB presents graphs which show that a 24-hour infection with BCG was associated with a reduction in GPN-induced Ca2+ release, whereas infection with nonpathogenic Mycobacterium smegmatis (M smegmatis) was not.
Figure 1C presents a histogram and micrographs showing the results of direct measurement of endo-lysosomal Ca2+ content with a luminal Ca2+-dye (low-affinity Rhod- dextran), and confirming the reduced levels of lysosomal Ca2+ in BCG-infected RAW cells.
Figure ID is a histogram demonstrating the elevated GSL NPC phenotype: total GSL levels were significantly elevated by 48 hours. Figure 2A is a histogram showing that, accumulation of lactosylceramide (LacCer), which occurs in NPC cells and in tissues of Npcl'1' mice was not detected at 24 and 48 hours post-infection (BCG-infected RAW 264.7 cells) but was significantly elevated 7 days post-infection.
Figure 2B contains micrographs showing cholesterol accumulation in punctate structures in BCG infected RAW 264.7 cells, but not in cells infected with non-pathogenic M. Smegmatis.
Figure 2C is a histogram of the results of biochemical quantitation of cholesterol in control and BCG-infected cells, showing the higher cholesterol level in BCG-infected cells.
Figure 3 A contains micrographs showing that the following hallmarks of NPC were induced by BCG infection but not by M smegmatis: the storage and mislocalisation (altered trafficking) of GM1 ganglioside (Fig. 3 Ai) and sphingomyelin respectively (Fig. 3Aii).
Figure 3B presents a histogram showing statistically significant elevation of GSLs in ¾-infected cells together with representative FIPLC traces.
Figure 3C is a histogram showing increased levels of sphingosine in monocyte-derived macrophages from healthy donors infected with BCG compared to controls.
Figure 3D is a histogram showing reduced LE/Lys Ca2+ levels (indirectly assayed by GPN-evoked Ca2+ release) in monocyte-derived macrophages from healthy donors infected with BCG compared to controls.
Figure 4A is a histogram showing elevated GSL levels in monocyte-derived macrophages from healthy donors infected with BCG compared to controls.
Figure 4B presents micrographs showing the detection of cholesterol storage in the LE/Lys in BCG-infected human macrophages (and in non-infected neighbouring cells) (Fig. 4Bi), accompanied by mi straffi eking of GM1 ganglioside (Fig. 4Bii). Significant expansion of the lysosomal compartment was also detected, another hallmark of NPC (Fig. 4Biii). None of these changes occurred when human macrophages were infected with nonpathogenic M. smegmatis (Fig 4Bi-iii).
Figure 5 A presents micrographs showing that chloroform: methanol-extracted BCG lipids induced accumulation/re-distribution of cholesterol (Fig 5Ai), mistrafficking of GM1 ganglioside (Fig 5Aii) and accumulation/re-distribution of sphingomyelin (Fig 5Aiii) in uninfected RAW 264.7 macrophages, comparable to the NPC phenotypes induced by live mycobacteria. Figure 5B presents micrographs showing that a heat-treated preparation of the chloroform: methanol-extracted BCG lipids had the same ability to affect GM1 ganglioside distribution as the non-heat-treated fraction, suggesting that the NPC phenotype-inducing agent was a lipid and not proteinaceous.
Figure 5C presents micrographs showing that M¾-derived my colic acids (the major cell wall-derived class of lipids m Mtb) induced storage of cholesterol and sphingomyelin in RAW 246.7 macrophages (Fig. 5Ci and ii).
Figure 6 A presents micrographs showing thatM¾-derived my colic acids induced cholesterol storage and GM1 mistrafficking in primary human macrophages.
Figure 6B is a histogram showing that, oiMtb derived trehalose dimycolate (TDM), trehalose monomycolate (TMM) and glucose monomycolate (GMM), TDM gave the greatest increase in Lysotracker fluorescence, indicative of NPC-like lysosomal expansion/storage, whereas GMM and TMM caused only modest lysosomal expansion that did not reach statistical significance, and GMM from non-pathogenic M. smegmatis had minimal effect.
Figure 7 presents histograms, which show that, in addition to affecting lysosomal morphology, TDM from bovis also recapitulated NPC phenotypes in terms of reduced LE/Lys Ca2+ levels.
Figure 8 presents micrographs showing that TDM from bovis also recapitulated NPC phenotypes in terms of cholesterol storage (Fig. 8i) and GM1 mistrafficking (Fig. 8ii).
Figure 9 is a histogram showing that TDM fromM bovis also recapitulated NPC phenotypes in terms of GSL accumulation.
Figure 1 OA is a histogram showing that bone marrow-derived macrophages with 50% of wild-type NPC1 protein levels (heterozygous NPC1 cells) were more susceptible to inhibition by TDM than wild-type cells.
Figure 10B presents micrographs demonstrating that CHO cells overexpressing NPC1 were more resistant to induction of NPC cellular phenotypes than wild-type cells when exposed to TDM. The extent of NPC 1 overexpression was proportional to the resistance to phenotype induction; cells over-expressing NPC1 by 15-fold were more resistant than those over-expressing NPC 1 5-fold.
Figure 11 shows the expression levels of NPC 1 and NPC2 proteins in RAW264.7 cells infected with BCG: expression of NPC1 protein was up regulated in infected cells, but there were no changes in NPC2 levels. Figure 12 presents (i) micrographs and (ii) a histogram showing that RAW 246.7 cells in which an NPC phenotype was pharmacologically induced by incubation with U18666A, prior to infection, had impaired ability to clear non-pathogenic M. smegmatis relative to untreated cells.
Figure 13 is a histogram showing impaired clearance ofM smegmatis in Npcl'A bone marrow-derived mouse macrophages and U18666A-treated wild-type mouse macrophages.
Figure 14 is a histogram showing impaired clearance ofM smegmatis in primary human macrophages treated with U18666A.
Figure 15 presents a fluorescence trace and a histogram showing the frequency and extent of mycobacterial infection of RAW264.7 cells treated with mCherry-expressing BCG for 48 hours, then treated with or without 30 μΜ high-purity curcumin for a further 24 hours, by quantifying the fluorescence of mCherry-expressing M. bovis BCG using a FACS assay.
Figure 16 presents two histograms (i and ii) showing: (i, ii) that a significantly lower level of infection (i.e. enhanced clearance) was observed in cells incubated with curcumin relative to untreated cells; (i) that neither miglustat alone nor β-cyclodextrin alone promoted mycobacterial clearance over the time course; (i) that miglustat in combination with curcumin showed synergy; (ii) that no synergy was seen when curcumin and cyclodextrin were used in combination.
Figure 17 is a histogram showing that curcumin significantly reduced mycobacterial burden in infected primary human macrophages.
Figure 18 presents a graph and a histogram showing that, whilst high-purity curcumin
(SERCA antagonist) promoted BCG clearance, the inactive curcumin analogue FLLL31
(not a SERCA antagonist) had no effect.
Figure 19 is a graph showing that bacterial clearance by curcumin was abrogated by loading cells with the Ca2+ chelator, BAPTA, to suppress a cytosolic Ca2+ increase.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Substituent definitions
The following definitions apply to the SERCA antagonists and the inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis defined herein:
A Ci-20 alkyl group is an unsubstituted or substituted, straight or branched chain saturated hydrocarbon radical. Typically it is Ci-io alkyl, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl or decyl, or Ci-6 alkyl, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl or hexyl, or C1-4 alkyl, for example methyl, ethyl, i- propyl, n-propyl, t-butyl, s-butyl or n-butyl. When an alkyl group is substituted it typically bears one or more substituents selected from substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl (as defined herein), cyano, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci- io)alkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, arylalkylamino, amido, acylamido, hydroxy, oxo, halo, carboxy, ester, acyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, aryloxy, haloalkyl, sulfonic acid, sulfhydryl (i.e. thiol, -SH), Ci-10 alkylthio, arylthio, sulfonyl, phosphoric acid, phosphate ester, phosphonic acid and phosphonate ester. Examples of substituted alkyl groups include haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, alkoxyalkyl and alkaryl groups. The term alkaryl, as used herein, pertains to a Ci-20 alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom has been replaced with an aryl group. Examples of such groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl (phenylmethyl, PhCH2-), benzhydryl (Ph2CH-), trityl (triphenylmethyl, Ph3C-), phenethyl (phenylethyl, Ph-CH2CH2-), styryl (Ph-CH=CH-), cinnamyl (Ph-CH=CH-CH2-).
Typically a substituted Ci-2o alkyl group carries 1, 2 or 3 substituents, for instance 1 or 2.
A C3 -25 cycloalkyl group is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl group which is also a cyclyl group; that is, a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from an alicyclic ring atom of a carbocyclic ring of a carbocyclic compound, which moiety has from 3 to 25 carbon atoms (unless otherwise specified), including from 3 to 25 ring atoms. Thus, the term "cycloalkyl" includes the sub-classes cycloalkyenyl and cycloalkynyl.
Examples of groups of C3-25 cycloalkyl groups include C3-2o cycloalkyl, C3 -i5 cycloalkyl, C3-io cycloalkyl, C3 -7 cycloalkyl. When a C3-25 cycloalkyl group is substituted it typically bears one or more substituents selected from Ci-6 alkyl which is unsubstituted, aryl (as defined herein), cyano, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, arylalkylamino, amido, acylamido, hydroxy, oxo, halo, carboxy, ester, acyl, acyloxy, Ci-2o alkoxy, aryloxy, haloalkyl, sulfonic acid, sulfhydryl (i.e. thiol, -SH), Ci-10 alkylthio, arylthio, phosphoric acid, phosphate ester, phosphonic acid and phosphonate ester and sulfonyl. Typically a substituted C3-25 cycloalkyl group carries 1, 2 or 3 substituents, for instance 1 or 2.
Examples of C3-25 cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from saturated monocyclic hydrocarbon compounds, which C3-25 cycloalkyl groups are unsubstituted or substituted as defined above: cyclopropane (C3), cyclobutane (C4), cyclopentane (C5), cyclohexane (C6), cycloheptane (C7), methylcyclopropane (C4), dimethylcyclopropane (C5),
methylcyclobutane (C5), dimethylcyclobutane (C6), methylcyclopentane (C6),
dimethylcyclopentane (C7), methylcyclohexane (C7), dimethylcyclohexane (C8), menthane unsaturated monocyclic hydrocarbon compounds:
cyclopropene (C3), cyclobutene (C4), cyclopentene (C5), cyclohexene (C6), methylcyclopropene (C4), dimethylcyclopropene (C5), methylcyclobutene (C5), dimethylcyclobutene (C6), methylcyclopentene (C6), dimethylcyclopentene (C7), methylcyclohexene (C7), dimethylcyclohexene (C8);
saturated polycyclic hydrocarbon compounds:
thujane (Cio), carane (Cio), pinane (Cio), bornane (Cio), norcarane (C7), norpinane (C7), norbornane C7), adamantane (Cio , decalin (decahydronaphthalene) (Cio);
Figure imgf000013_0001
unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon compounds: camphene (Cio), limonene (Cio), pinene (Cio
Figure imgf000013_0002
polycyclic hydrocarbon compounds having an aromatic ring:
indene (C9), indane (e.g., 2,3-dihydro-lH-indene) (C9), tetraline
(1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene) (Cio), acenaphthene (C12), fluorene (C13), phenalene (C13), acephenanthrene (C15), aceanthrene (C16), cholanthrene (C20).
A C3-20 heterocyclyl group is an unsubstituted or substituted monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a ring atom of a heterocyclic compound, which moiety has from 3 to 20 ring atoms (unless otherwise specified), of which from 1 to 10 are ring heteroatoms. Preferably, each ring has from 3 to 7 ring atoms, of which from 1 to 4 are ring heteroatoms. When a C3-20 heterocyclyl group is substituted it typically bears one or more substituents selected from Ci-6 alkyl which is unsubstituted, aryl (as defined herein), cyano, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, arylalkylamino, amido, acylamido, hydroxy, oxo, halo, carboxy, ester, acyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, aryloxy, haloalkyl, sulfonic acid, sulfhydryl (i.e. thiol, -SH), Ci-10 alkylthio, arylthio, phosphoric acid, phosphate ester, phosphonic acid and phosphonate ester and sulfonyl. Typically a substituted C3 -20 heterocyclyl group carries 1, 2 or 3 substituents, for instance 1 or 2.
Examples of groups of heterocyclyl groups include C3-2oheterocyclyl,
C5-2oheterocyclyl, Cs-isheterocyclyl, Cs-isheterocyclyl, C3-i2heterocyclyl, Cs-nheterocyclyl, C3-ioheterocyclyl, Cs-ioheterocyclyl, C3-7heterocyclyl, C5-7heterocyclyl, and
C5-6heterocyclyl.
Examples of (non-aromatic) monocyclic C3-20 heterocyclyl groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from:
Ni: aziridine (C3), azetidine (C4), pyrrolidine (tetrahydropyrrole) (C5), pyrroline (e.g., 3-pyrroline, 2,5-dihydropyrrole) (C5), 2H-pyrrole or 3H-pyrrole (isopyrrole, isoazole) (C5), piperidine (C6), dihydropyridine (C6), tetrahydropyridine (C6), azepine (C7);
Oi: oxirane (C3), oxetane (C4), oxolane (tetrahydrofuran) (C5), oxole
(dihydrofuran) (C5), oxane (tetrahydropyran) (C6), dihydropyran (C6), pyran (C6), oxepin (C7);
Si: thiirane (C3), thietane (C4), thiolane (tetrahydrothiophene) (C5), thiane
(tetrahydrothiopyran) (C6), thiepane (C7);
O2: dioxolane (C5), dioxane (C6), and dioxepane (C7);
O3 : trioxane (C6);
N2: imidazolidine (C5), pyrazolidine (diazolidine) (C5), imidazoline (C5), pyrazoline (dihydropyrazole) (C5), piperazine (C6);
N1O1 : tetrahydrooxazole (C5), dihydrooxazole (C5), tetrahydroisoxazole (C5), dihydroisoxazole (C5), morpholine (C6), tetrahydrooxazine (C6), dihydrooxazine (C6), oxazine (C6);
N1 S1 : thiazoline (C5), thiazolidine (C5), thiomorpholine (C6);
N2O1 : oxadiazine (C6);
O1 S1 : oxathiole (C5) and oxathiane (thioxane) (C6); and,
N1O1 S1 : oxathiazine (C6). Examples of substituted (non-aromatic) monocyclic heterocyclyl groups include those derived from saccharides, in cyclic form, for example, furanoses (C5), such as arabinofuranose, lyxofuranose, ribofuranose, and xylofuranse, and pyranoses (C6), such as allopyranose, altropyranose, glucopyranose, mannopyranose, gulopyranose, idopyranose, galactopyranose, and talopyranose. C3-20 heterocyclyl includes groups derived from heterocyclic compounds of the following structure:
Figure imgf000015_0001
herein x is 0 or 1; z is CHR84; and R80, R81, R82, R83 and R! which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido and a group derived from a second group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000015_0002
in which second group x is 0 or 1; z is CHR ; and R , R , R , R and R , which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido. The term "group derived from" in this case means that the group is a monovalent moiety obtained by removing the R80, R81, R82, R83 or R84 atom from a carbon atom of the above compounds. Thus, C3-20 heterocyclyl includes groups of the following structure:
Figure imgf000015_0003
wherein each of the ring carbon atoms is independently unsubstituted or substituted with Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido.
C3-20 heterocyclyl also includes groups in which two heterocyclic rings are linked by an oxygen atom. Thus, C3-20 heterocyclyl includes disaccharide groups, in which two monosaccharide heterocyclic rings are linked with an oxygen atom. Accordingly, C3-20 heterocyclyl includes groups of the following formula (m):
Figure imgf000016_0001
wherein each Rm, which is the same or different, is independently selected from Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy,
Ci-io alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido. Thus, the following disaccharide group is one example of a substituted C3-20 heterocyclic group:
Figure imgf000016_0002
Examples of C3-20 heterocyclyl groups which are also aryl groups are described below as heteroaryl groups.
An aryl group is a substituted or unsubstituted, monocyclic or bicyclic aromatic group which typically contains from 6 to 14 carbon atoms, preferably from 6 to 10 carbon atoms in the ring portion. Examples include phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl and indanyl groups. An aryl group is unsubstituted or substituted. When an aryl group as defined above is substituted it typically bears one or more substituents selected from Ci-C6 alkyl which is unsubstituted (to form an aralkyl group), aryl which is unsubstituted, cyano, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, arylalkylamino, amido, acylamido, hydroxy, halo, carboxy, ester, acyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, aryloxy, haloalkyl, sulfhydryl (i.e. thiol, -SH), Ci-10 alkylthio, arylthio, sulfonic acid, phosphoric acid, phosphate ester, phosphonic acid and phosphonate ester and sulfonyl. Typically it carries 0, 1, 2 or 3 substituents. A substituted aryl group may be substituted in two positions with a single Ci-6 alkylene group, or with a bidentate group represented by the formula -X-Ci-6 alkylene, or -X-Ci-6 alkylene-X-, wherein X is selected from O, S and R, and wherein R is H, aryl or Ci-6 alkyl. Thus a substituted aryl group may be an aryl group fused with a cycloalkyl group or with a heterocyclyl group. The term aralkyl as used herein, pertains to an aryl group in which at least one hydrogen atom (e.g., 1, 2, 3) has been substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl group. Examples of such groups include, but are not limited to, tolyl (from toluene), xylyl (from xylene), mesityl (from mesitylene), and cumenyl (or cumyl, from cumene), and duryl (from durene). The ring atoms of an aryl group may include one or more heteroatoms (as in a heteroaryl group). Such an aryl group (a heteroaryl group) is a substituted or unsubstituted mono- or bicyclic heteroaromatic group which typically contains from 6 to 10 atoms in the ring portion including one or more heteroatoms. It is generally a 5- or 6-membered ring, containing at least one heteroatom selected from O, S, N, P, Se and Si. It may contain, for example, 1, 2 or 3 heteroatoms. Examples of heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, quinolyl and isoquinolyl. A heteroaryl group may be unsubstituted or substituted, for instance, as specified above for aryl. Typically it carries 0, 1, 2 or 3 substituents.
A Ci-20 alkylene group is an unsubstituted or substituted bidentate moiety obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms, either both from the same carbon atom, or one from each of two different carbon atoms, of a hydrocarbon compound having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms (unless otherwise specified), which may be aliphatic or alicyclic, and which may be saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated. Thus, the term "alkylene" includes the sub-classes alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkylene, etc., discussed below. Typically it is Ci-io alkylene, for instance Ci-6 alkylene. Typically it is Ci-4 alkylene, for example methylene, ethylene, i-propylene, n-propylene, t-butylene, s-butylene or n- butylene. It may also be pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene and the various branched chain isomers thereof. An alkylene group may be unsubstituted or substituted, for instance, as specified above for alkyl. Typically a substituted alkylene group carries 1, 2 or 3 substituents, for instance 1 or 2.
In this context, the prefixes (e.g., Ci-4, C1-7, C1-20, C2-7, C3-7, etc.) denote the number of carbon atoms, or range of number of carbon atoms. For example, the term
"Ci-4alkylene," as used herein, pertains to an alkylene group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Examples of groups of alkylene groups include Ci-4 alkylene ("lower alkylene"), Ci-7 alkylene, Ci-io alkylene and C1 -20 alkylene.
Examples of linear saturated C1-7 alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, -(0¾)η- where n is an integer from 1 to 7, for example, -CH2- (methylene), -CH2CH2- (ethylene), -CH2CH2CH2- (propylene), and -CH2CH2CH2CH2- (butylene).
Examples of branched saturated C1-7 alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, -CH(CH3)-, -CH(CH3)CH2-, -CH(CH3)CH2CH2-, -CH(CH3)CH2CH2CH2-,
-CH2CH(CH3)CH2-, -CH2CH(CH3)CH2CH2-, -CH(CH2CH3)-, -CH(CH2CH3)CH2-, and -CH2CH(CH2CH3)CH2-. Examples of linear partially unsaturated C1-7 alkylene groups include, but is not limited to, -CH=CH- (vinylene), -CH=CH-CH2-, -CH2-CH=CH2-, -CH=CH-CH2-CH2-, -CH=CH-CH2-CH2-CH2-, -CH=CH-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-CH=CH-CH2-, -CH=CH- CH=CH-CH2-CH2-, -CH=CH-CH2-CH=CH-, and -CH=CH-CH2-CH2-CH=CH-.
Examples of branched partially unsaturated C1-7 alkylene groups include, but is not limited to, -C(CH3)=CH-, -C(CH3)=CH-CH2-, and -CH=CH-CH(CH3)-.
Examples of alicyclic saturated C1-7 alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopentylene (e.g., cyclopent-l,3-ylene), and cyclohexylene (e.g., cyclohex-l,4-ylene).
Examples of alicyclic partially unsaturated C1-7 alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopentenylene (e.g., 4-cyclopenten-l,3-ylene), cyclohexenylene (e.g., 2-cyclohexen- 1 ,4-ylene; 3 -cy clohexen- 1 ,2-ylene; 2,5-cyclohexadien- 1 ,4-ylene).
C1-20 alkylene and C1-20 alkyl groups as defined herein are either uninterrupted or interrupted by one or more heteroatoms or heterogroups, such as S, O or N(R") wherein R" is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl (typically phenyl), or by one or more arylene (typically phenylene) groups. The phrase "optionally interrupted" as used herein thus refers to a C1-20 alkyl group or an alkylene group, as defined above, which is uninterrupted or which is interrupted between adjacent carbon atoms by a heteroatom such as oxygen or sulfur, by a heterogroup such as N(R") wherein R" is H, aryl or Ci-C6 alkyl, or by an arylene group.
For instance, a C1-20 alkyl group such as n-butyl may be interrupted by the heterogroup N(R") as follows: -CH2N(R")CH2CH2CH3, -CH2CH2N(R")CH2CH3, or
-CH2CH2CH2N(R")CH3. Similarly, an alkylene group such as n-butylene may be interrupted by the heterogroup N(R") as follows: -CH2N(R")CH2CH2CH2-,
-CH2CH2N(R")CH2CH2-, or -CH2CH2CH2N(R")CH2-. Typically an interrupted group, for instance an interrupted C1-20 alkylene or C1-20 alkyl group, is interrupted by 1, 2 or 3 heteroatoms or heterogroups or by 1, 2 or 3 arylene (typically phenylene) groups. More typically, an interrupted group, for instance an interrupted C1-20 alkylene or C1-20 alkyl group, is interrupted by 1 or 2 heteroatoms or heterogroups or by 1 or 2 arylene (typically phenylene) groups. For instance, a C1-20 alkyl group such as n-butyl may be interrupted by 2 heterogroups N(R") as follows: -CH2N(R")CH2N(R")CH2CH3.
An arylene group is an unsubstituted or substituted bidentate moiety obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms, one from each of two different aromatic ring atoms of an aromatic compound, which moiety has from 5 to 14 ring atoms (unless otherwise specified). Typically, each ring has from 5 to 7 or from 5 to 6 ring atoms. An arylene group may be unsubstituted or substituted, for instance, as specified above for aryl. In this context, the prefixes (e.g., C5-20, C6-20, C5-14, C5-7, C5-6, etc.) denote the number of ring atoms, or range of number of ring atoms, whether carbon atoms or heteroatoms. For example, the term "C5-6 arylene," as used herein, pertains to an arylene group having 5 or 6 ring atoms. Examples of groups of arylene groups include C5-20 arylene, C6-2o arylene, C5-14 arylene, C6-i4 arylene, C6-io arylene, C5-12 arylene, C5-10 arylene, C5-7 arylene, C5-6 arylene, C5 arylene, and C6 arylene.
The ring atoms may be all carbon atoms, as in "carboarylene groups" (e.g., C6-2o carboarylene, C6-i4 carboarylene or C6-io carboarylene).
Examples of C6-2o arylene groups which do not have ring heteroatoms (i.e., C6-2o carboarylene groups) include, but are not limited to, those derived from the compounds discussed above in regard to aryl groups, e.g. phenylene, and also include those derived from aryl groups which are bonded together, e.g. phenylene-phenylene (diphenylene) and phenyl ene-pheny 1 ene-pheny 1 ene (tripheny 1 ene) .
Alternatively, the ring atoms may include one or more heteroatoms, as in
"heteroarylene groups" (e.g., C5-10 heteroarylene).
Examples of C5-10 heteroarylene groups include, but are not limited to, those derived from the compounds discussed above in regard to heteroaryl groups.
As used herein the term oxo represents a group of formula: =0
As used herein the term acyl represents a group of formula: -C(=0)R, wherein R is an acyl substituent, for example, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted C3-20 heterocyclyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. Examples of acyl groups include, but are not limited to, -C(=0)CH3 (acetyl), -C(=0)CH2CH3 (propionyl), -C(=0)C(CH3)3 (t-butyryl), and -C(=0)Ph (benzoyl, phenone).
As used herein the term acyloxy (or reverse ester) represents a group of formula:
-OC(=0)R, wherein R is an acyloxy substituent, for example, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted C3 -2oheterocyclyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, typically a Ci-6 alkyl group. Examples of acyloxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OC(=0)CH3 (acetoxy), -OC(=0)CH2CH3, -OC(=0)C(CH3)3, -OC(=0)Ph, and -OC(=0)CH2Ph.
As used herein the term ester (or carboxylate, carboxylic acid ester or oxycarbonyl) represents a group of formula: -C(=0)OR, wherein R is an ester substituent, for example, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted C3 -2o heterocyclyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group (typically a phenyl group). Examples of ester groups include, but are not limited to, -C(=0)OCH3, -C(=0)OCH2CH3, -C(=0)OC(CH3)3, and -C(=0)OPh.
As used herein the term phosphonic acid represents a group of the formula:
-P(=0)(OH)2. As would be understood by the skilled person, a phosphonic acid group can exist in protonated and deprotonated forms (i.e. -P(=0)(OH)2, -P(=0)(0")2 and
-P(=0)(OH)(0")) all of which are within the scope of the term "phosphonic acid".
As used herein the term phosphonic acid salt represents a group which is a salt of a phosphonic acid group. For example a phosphonic acid salt may be a group of the formula -P(=0)(OH)(0"X+) wherein X is a monovalent cation. X+ may be an alkali metal cation. X+ may be Na+ or K+, for example.
As used herein the term phosphonate ester represents a group of one of the formulae:
-P(=0)(OR)2 and -P(=0)(OR)0" wherein each R is independently a phosphonate ester substituent, for example, -H, substituted or unsubstituted C1-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-2o heterocyclyl, C3 -2o heterocyclyl substituted with a further C3-2o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkylene-C3 -2o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3 -25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C1-20 alkylene-C3 -25 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C1-20 alkylene-aryl. Examples of phosphonate ester groups include, but are not limited to, -P(=0)(OCH3)2, -P(=0)(OCH2CH3)2, -P(=0)(0- t-Bu)2, and -P(=0)(OPh)2,
As used herein the term phosphoric acid represents a group of the formula:
-OP(=0)(OH)2.
As used herein the term phosphate ester represents a group of one of the formulae: -OP(=0)(OR)2 and -OP(=0)(OR)0" wherein each R is independently a phosphate ester substituent, for example, -H, substituted or unsubstituted C1-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3 -20 heterocyclyl, C3 -2o heterocyclyl substituted with a further C3-2o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkylene-C3 -2o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3 -25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3 -25 cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-aryl. Examples of phosphate ester groups include, but are not limited to, -OP(=0)(OCH3)2, -OP(=0)(OCH2CH3)2,
-OP(=0)(0-t-Bu)2, and -OP(=0)(OPh)2.
As used herein the term amino represents a group of formula -NH2. The term Ci- C10 alkylamino represents a group of formula - FR' wherein R' is a Ci-10 alkyl group, preferably a Ci-6 alkyl group, as defined previously. The term di(Ci-io)alkylamino represents a group of formula -NR'R' ' wherein R' and R' ' are the same or different and represent C1-10 alkyl groups, preferably Ci-6 alkyl groups, as defined previously. The term arylamino represents a group of formula -NHR' wherein R' is an aryl group, preferably a phenyl group, as defined previously. The term diarylamino represents a group of formula -NR'R" wherein R' and R" are the same or different and represent aryl groups, preferably phenyl groups, as defined previously. The term arylalkylamino represents a group of formula -NR'R" wherein R' is a Ci-io alkyl group, preferably a Ci-6 alkyl group, and R" is an aryl group, preferably a phenyl group.
As used herein the term amido represents a group of formula: -C(=0)NR R , wherein R and R are independently amino substituents, as defined for di(Ci-io)alkylamino groups. Examples of amido groups include, but are not limited to, -C(=0)NH2,
-C(=0)NHCH3, -C(=0)N(CH3)2, -C(=0)NHCH2CH3, and -C(=0)N(CH2CH3)2, as well as amido groups in which R and R , together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a heterocyclic structure as in, for example, piperidinocarbonyl,
morpholinocarbonyl, thiomorpholinocarbonyl, and piperazinocarbonyl.
As used herein the term acylamido represents a group of formula: -NR1C(=0)R2, wherein R1 is an amide substituent, for example, hydrogen, a Ci-2oalkyl group, a C3-2o heterocyclyl group, an aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a Ci-2o alkyl group, and R2 is an acyl substituent, for example, a Ci-2o alkyl group, a C3-2o heterocyclyl group, or an aryl group, preferably hydrogen or a Ci-2o alkyl group. Examples of acylamide groups include, but are not limited to, -NHC(=0)CH3 , -NHC(=0)CH2CH3, -NHC(=0)Ph,
Figure imgf000021_0001
Thus, a substituted Ci-20 alkyl group may comprise an acylamido substituent defined by the formula -NHC(=0)-Ci-2o alkyl, such as -NHC(=0)Ci5H3 i or -NHC(=0)C9Hi9. R1 and R2 may together form a cyclic structure, as in, for exam le, succinimidyl, maleimidyl, and phthalimidyl:
Figure imgf000021_0002
succinimidyl maleimidyl phthalimidyl
A Ci-io alkylthio group is a said Ci-io alkyl group, preferably a Ci-6 alkyl group, attached to a thio group. An arylthio group is an aryl group, preferably a phenyl group, attached to a thio group.
A Ci-20 alkoxy group is a said substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkyl group attached to an oxygen atom. A Ci-6 alkoxy group is a said substituted or unsubstituted Ci alkyl group attached to an oxygen atom. A C1-4 alkoxy group is a substituted or unsubstituted C1-4 alkyl group attached to an oxygen atom. Said Ci-20, Ci-6 and C1-4 alkyl groups are optionally interrupted as defined herein. Examples of C1-4 alkoxy groups include, -OMe (methoxy), -OEt (ethoxy), -O(nPr) (n-propoxy), -O(iPr) (isopropoxy), -O(nBu) (n-butoxy), -O(sBu) (sec-butoxy), -O(iBu) (isobutoxy), and -O(tBu) (tert-butoxy). Further examples of Ci-20 alkoxy groups are -O(Adamantyl), -O-CFFi-Adamantyl and -O- CFFi-CFFi-Adamantyl. An aryloxy group is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, as defined herein, attached to an oxygen atom. An example of an aryloxy group is -OPh (phenoxy).
Unless otherwise specified, included in the above are the well known ionic, salt, solvate, and protected forms of these substituents. For example, a reference to carboxylic acid or carboxyl group (-COOH) also includes the anionic (carboxylate) form (-COO"), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms. Similarly, a reference to an amino group includes the protonated form (-^HR^2), a salt or solvate of the amino group, for example, a hydrochloride salt, as well as conventional protected forms of an amino group. Similarly, a reference to a hydroxyl group also includes the anionic form (- O"), a salt or solvate thereof, as well as conventional protected forms.
Certain compounds may exist in one or more particular geometric, optical, enantiomeric, diasteriomeric, epimeric, atropic, stereoisomeric, tautomeric,
conformational, or anomeric forms, including but not limited to, cis- and trans-forms; E- and Z-forms; c-, t-, and r- forms; endo- and exo-forms; R-, S-, and meso-forms; D- and Informs; d- and 1-forms; (+) and (-) forms; keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms; syn- and anti- forms; synclinal- and anticlinal-forms; a- and β-forms; axial and equatorial forms; boat-, chair-, twist-, envelope-, and halfchair- forms; and combinations thereof, hereinafter collectively referred to as "isomers" (or "isomeric forms").
Note that, except as discussed below for tautomeric forms, specifically excluded from the term "isomers," as used herein, are structural (or constitutional) isomers
(i.e., isomers which differ in the connections between atoms rather than merely by the position of atoms in space). For example, a reference to a methoxy group, -OCH3, is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, a hydroxymethyl group, -CH2OH. Similarly, a reference to ortho-chlorophenyl is not to be construed as a reference to its structural isomer, meta-chlorophenyl. However, a reference to a class of structures may well include structurally isomeric forms falling within that class (e.g., Ci-7alkyl includes n-propyl and iso-propyl; butyl includes n-, iso-, sec-, and tert-butyl; methoxyphenyl includes ortho-, meta-, and para-methoxyphenyl).
The above exclusion does not pertain to tautomeric forms, for example, keto, enol, and enolate forms, as in, for example, the following tautomeric pairs: keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol, amidine/amidine, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, N-nitroso/hyroxyazo, and nitro/aci-nitro.
Figure imgf000023_0001
keto enol enolate
Note that specifically included in the term "isomer" are compounds with one or more isotopic substitutions. For example, H may be in any isotopic form, including ¾, 2H (D), and 3H (T); C may be in any isotopic form, including 12C, 13C, and 14C; O may be in any isotopic form, including 160 and 180; and the like.
Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound includes all such isomeric forms, including (wholly or partially) racemic and other mixtures thereof.
Methods for the preparation (e.g., asymmetric synthesis) and separation (e.g., fractional crystallisation and chromatographic means) of such isomeric forms are either known in the art or are readily obtained by adapting known methods, in a known manner.
Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound also includes ionic, salt, solvate, protected forms and prodrugs thereof.
Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds for use in accordance with the present invention include salts with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulphuric acid, nitric acid and phosphoric acid; and organic acids such as methanesulfonic acid, benzenesulphonic acid, formic acid, acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, isobutyric acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, ethanesulfonic acid, aspartic acid, benzoic acid and glutamic acid. Typically the salt is a hydrochloride, an acetate, a propionate, a benzoate, a butyrate or an isobutyrate. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al., 1977, "Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts," J. Pharm. Sci., Vol. 66, pp. 1-19.
A prodrug of a SERCA antagonist or an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid
biosynthesis, is a compound which, when metabolised (e.g., in vivo), yields the desired active compound. Typically, the prodrug is inactive, or less active than the active compound, but may provide advantageous handling, administration, or metabolic
properties.
For example, some prodrugs are O-acylated (acyloxy) derivatives of the active compound, i.e. physiologically acceptable metabolically labile acylated derivatives.
During metabolism, the one or more -O-acyl (acyloxy) groups (-0-C(=0)Rp) are cleaved to yield the active drug. Rp may be a C1-10 alkyl group, an aryl group or a C3-20 cycloalkyl group. Typically, Rp is a Ci-10 alkyl group including, but not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl and decyl. Such derivatives may be formed by acylation, for example, of any of the hydroxyl groups (-OH) in the parent compound, with, where appropriate, prior protection of any other reactive groups present in the parent compound, followed by deprotection if required. Thus, the free hydroxyl groups on an iminosugar inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis (for instance DNJ, DGJ, or an N-alkylated derivative of DNJ or DGJ such as NB-DNJ or NB-DGJ) may be acylated with up to four, typically exactly four, O-acyl groups. The O-acyl groups are enzymatically removed in vivo to provide the non-O-acylated (i.e. hydroxyl-containing) active inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
Some prodrugs are esters of the active compound (e.g., a physiologically
acceptable metabolically labile ester). During metabolism, the ester group (-C(=0)OR) is cleaved to yield the active drug. Such esters may be formed by esterification, for example, of any of the carboxylic acid groups (-C(=0)OH) in the parent compound, with, where appropriate, prior protection of any other reactive groups present in the parent compound, followed by deprotection if required.
The SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis can be used in the free form or the salt form. Either or both agents may also be used in prodrug form. The prodrug can itself be used in the free form or the salt form.
SERCA antagonists
SERCA antagonists are known compounds. J. Med. Chem. 2005, 48, 7005-7011 describes thapsigargin and various analogs thereof as potent SERCA antagonists, and compares the respective activities of the compounds. Curcumin is also a SERCA antagonist; Eur. J. Biochem, 268, 6318-6327 (2001) details the SERCA inhibitory activity of curcumin. Cyclopiazonic acid is also a known SERCA antagonist.
SERCA antagonists may be readily identified, without undue experimentation, using known procedures. J. Med. Chem. 2005, 48, 7005-701 1 describes how SERCA antagonists may be designed (for instance, using the structure of a known SERCA antagonist as a starting point) and then tested for SERCA inhibitory activity. A standard assay for the measurement of SERCA inhibitory activity is described in J. Med. Chem. 2005, 48, p 7010. Eur. J.
Biochem, 268, 6318-6327 (2001) also describes how Ca2+ ATPase activity can be determined, in order to identify SERCA antagonists, using a phosphate liberation assay described in Longland et al., Cell Calcium 24, 27-34 (1998).
The SERCA antagonist employed in the present invention may for instance be selected from curcumin, c clopiazonic acid and a compound of formula (A):
Figure imgf000025_0001
wherein:
RZ1 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, halo, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-io alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-io alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, Ci-io alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3- 25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said Ci-10 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene;
RZ2 is selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-10 alkyl and acyl, wherein said Ci-10 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene; and
either XZ1 is CH and XZ2 is CHR' wherein XZ1 and XZ2 are bonded by a C-C single bond, or XZ1 is C and XZ2 is CR' wherein XZ1 and XZ2 are bonded by a C=C double bond; and
R' is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl;
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
Typically, RZ1 is selected from H and ester. More typically, RZ1 is selected from H and -OC(0)(CH2)6CH3.
Typically, RZ2 is selected from Ci-10 alkyl and acyl. More typically, RZ2 is selected from ethyl and acetyl (i.e. -C(0)CH3).
Typically, XZ1 is CH and XZ2 is C(H)Me. Alternatively, XZ1 is C and XZ2 is C(H)Me. In one embodiment, RZ1 is -OC(0)(CH2)6CH3, RZ2 is -C(0)CH3, XZ1 is C and XZ2 is C(H)Me (i.e. the compound of formula A is thapsigargin).
In another embodiment, RZ1 is H, RZ2 is -C(0)CH3, XZ1 is C and XZ2 is C(H)Me (i.e. the compound of formula A is nortrilobolide).
In another embodiment, RZ1 is H, RZ2 is ethyl, XZ1 is CH and XZ2 is C(H)Me.
In another embodiment, RZ1 is H, RZ2 is -C(0)CH3, XZ1 is CH and XZ2 is C(H)Me.
The SERCA antagonist employed in the present invention may for instance be selected from curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
More typically, the SERCA antagonist is selected from thapsigargin, curcumin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
The chemical structure of curcumin is as follows:
Figure imgf000026_0001
The structure of thapsigargin is as follows
Figure imgf000026_0002
In a particularly preferred embodiment of the present invention, the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In the most preferred embodiment of the invention, the SERCA antagonist is curcumin.
Inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis
The term "inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis", as used herein, means a compound that is capable of inhibiting the synthesis or expression of a glycosphingolipid (GSL). Typically, the GSL is a ganglioside. Alternatively, the GSL is a neutral GSL.
Inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis are either known or readily
identifiable, without undue experimentation, using known procedures.
GSLs are synthesized from ceramide by the sequential addition of monosaccharides mediated by Golgi-resident glycosyltransferases. The two main classes of GSL are the neutral GSLs (lacto and globo series) and the gangliosides. Gangliosides contain sialic acid (neuraminic acid) and are consequently negatively charged. The majority of GSLs are glucose derivatives of ceramide. However, galactose based GSLs are also present and are particularly abundant in the CNS. Such galactose-based GSLs include the sulfatides.
A class of compounds which can affect the metabolism of glycosphingolipids, is that of formula (I) defined below. Some of these compounds (notably, NB-DNJ, miglustat) have found use in the treatment of congenital disorders of glycolipid storage (such as type I Gaucher disease, reviewed in Aerts JM et al. J. Inherit Metab. Dis. (2006) 29(2-3): 449- 453) and as potential anti-microbial agents (for example to modulate the toxicity of cholera toxin to ganglioside-type glycolipids, reviewed in Svensson M et al. Mol Microbiol. (2003) 47: 453-461).
Defects in GSL catabolism result in a build up of GSLs. Such diseases are termed GSL storage disorders. Small-molecule inhibitors such as the alkyl-imino sugars have been developed to inhibit the biosynthesis of glucosylceramide, the first step in the biosynthesis of GSLs. Such compounds are thus inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis which may be employed in the present invention. Glucosylceramide is synthesised by the action of glucosylceramide synthase (also known as UDP-glucose: N-acylsphingosine
glucosyltransferase), which catalyses the transfer of glucose to ceramide. The inhibition of glucosylceramide synthase can be achieved in vivo by small-molecule inhibitors
(Reviewed in Asano N. Glycobiology (2003) 13 :93-104). Inhibition can be achieved by small-molecule mimics of the substrate, transition state or product of glucosylceramide synthase. Such inhibitors include: (1) mimics of the carbohydrate moiety ("sugar mimics"), and (2) mimics of the ceramide or sphingosine moiety ("lipid mimics").
The sugar mimics (1) have received considerable attention and include
iminosugars such as nojirimycin, N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) and
N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ) (see US 5,472,969; US 5,656,641 ; US
6,465,488; US 6,610,703; US 6,291,657; US 5,580,884; Piatt F, J. Biol. Chem. (1994) 269:8362-8365; Piatt FM et al. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. Lond. B (2003) 358:947-954; and Butters TD et al. Glycobiology (2005) 15 :43-52). The modification of the iminosugar core with an alkyl chain such as a butyl group (as in NB-DNJ) or a nonyl group (as in NN-DNJ) are important for the clinical applications. Further sugar derivatives include N-(5- adamantane-l-yl-methoxypentyl)-DNJ (AMP-DNJ) (Overkleeft et al. J. Biol. Chem.
(1998) 41 :26522-26527), a-homogalactonojirimycin (HGJ) (Martin et al. 1995
Tetrahedron Letters 36: 10101-10116), a-homoallonojirimycin (HAJ) (Asano et al 1997 J. Nat. Prod. 60:98-101, Martin et al 1999 Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett 9:3171-3174) and β-1-C- butyl-DGJ (CB-DGJ) (Ikeda et al 2000 Carbohydrate Res. 323 :73-80). NB-DNJ results in measurable decrease in GSL levels within a day of treatment with the effect on GSL levels stabilizing after 10 days of treatment in mice (Piatt FM J. Biol. Chem. (1997) Aug
1;272(31): 19365-72.). Critically, both NB-DNJ and NB-DGJ penetrate the CNS without significant effects on behaviour or CNS development, and treatment of adult mice with NB-DNJ or NB-DGJ has been shown not to cause neurological side effects (U. Andersson et al, Neurobiology of Disease, 16 (2004) 506-515). NB-DGJ resulted in a marked reduction in total ganglioside and GMl content in cerebrum-brainstem (Kasperzyk et al. J. Lipid Res. (2005) 46:744-751).
Lipid mimics (2) have been developed to inhibit glycosphingolipid biosynthesis (Abe A. et al. J. Biochem Tokyo (1992) 11 1 : 191-196. Reviewed in Asano N.
Glycobiology (2003) 13 :93-104). Ceramide-based inhibitors include D,L-threo-l-phenyl- 2-decanoylamino-3-morpholino-l-propanol (PDMP) and D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2- hexadecanoylamino-3-morpholino-l-propanol (PPMP). Numerous derivatives have subsequently been developed such as: D-threo-l-phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l- propanol (P4), 4'-hydroxy-P4 (pOH-P4), 3',4'-ethylenedioxy-P4 (EtDO-P4; Genz-78132, Genzyme), N-[(1R,2R)- 1 -(2,3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -( 1 - pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat; Genz-99067) and salts thereof, including the eliglustat salt eliglustat tartrate (Genz-112638; Cerdelga) which has the IUPAC name: N-[(1R,2R)- 1 -(2,3 -dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -pyrrolidin- 1 -ylpropan-2- yl]octanamide;(2R,3R)-2,3-dihydroxybutanedioic acid. L-DMDP (Yu CY et al. Chem Commun (Camb). 2004 Sep 7;(17): 1936-7) has also been developed. Small-molecule inhibitors of galactosyltransferases have also been developed and are described in Chung SJ, Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 1998 Dec l;8(23):3359-64.
Accordingly, in one embodiment of the invention the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an inhibitor of a glycosyltransferase. Typically, the inhibitor mimics the substrate, transition state or product of the glycosyltransferase. In particular, the inhibitor may be a compound that mimics the carbohydrate moiety of the substrate, transition state or product of the glycosyltransferase. Alternatively, the inhibitor is a compound that mimics the lipid moiety of the substrate, transition state or product of the
glycosyltransferase. Typically, the glycosyltransferase is a glucosyltransferase. The glucosyltransferase is, for instance, glucosylceramide synthase. Alternatively, the glycosyltransferase may be a galactosyltransferase. The galactosyltransferase may be, for instance, β1-4 galactosyltransferase. Alternatively, the glycosyltransferase may be a ceramide galactosyltransferase. The ceramide galactosyltransferase may be, for instance, UDP-galactose:ceramide galactosyltransferase (also known as galactosylceramide synthase).
In principle, all glycosyltransferases can be inhibited by substrate mimics (Chung
SJ, Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 1998 Dec l;8(23):3359-64). Such substrate mimics can be employed for use in the present invention as inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
The skilled person can readily identify inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis without undue experimentation, using known procedures. For instance, inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis can be identified by incubating and or growing cells in culture in the presence of the putative inhibitor together with an assay for the effect of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis. Such assays include the analysis of fluorescently-labelled glycosphingolipid carbohydrate headgroups by HPLC, thin-layer chromatography (TLC) of glycosphingolipids and analysis of glycosphingolipids using mass spectrometry (Neville DC, Anal. Biochem. 2004 Aug 15;331(2):275-82; Mellor HR Biochem. J. 2004 Aug l;381(Pt 3):861-6; Hayashi Y. et al., Anal. Biochem. 2005 Oct 15;345(2): 181-6; Sandhoff, R. et al, J. Biol. Chem., vol. 277, no. 23, 20386-20398, 2002; Sandhoff, R. et al., J. Biol. Chem., vol. 280, no. 29, 27310-27318, 2005; Piatt, F.M. et al., J. Biol. Chem., vol. 269, issue 11, 8362-8365, 1994; Piatt, F.M. et al., J. Biol. Chem., vol. 269, issue 43, 27108- 27114, 1994).
Neville DC et al. (Anal. Biochem. 2004 Aug 15;331(2):275-82) have developed an optimised assay method in which fluorescently labelled glycosphingolipid-derived oligosaccharides are analysed. Thus, inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis for use in accordance with the present invention can be identified by incubating or growing cells in culture, in the presence of the putative inhibitor, and applying the assay described in
Neville et al. The assay described in Neville et al. enables GSL levels to be measured by HPLC analysis of GSL-derived oligosaccharides following ceramide glycanase digestion of the GSLs and anthranilic acid labelling of the released oligosaccharides. In the assay, glyocosphingolipids (GSLs) are extracted from the sample and purified by column chromatography. The extracted GSLs are then digested with ceramide glycanase. The extracted GSLs are first dried and redissolved, with mixing in 10 μΐ incubation buffer (50 μΜ sodium acetate, pH 5.0, containing lmg/ml sodium cholate or sodium
taurodeoxycholate). To this is added, with gentle mixing, 0.05 U ceramide glycanase in a further 10 μΐ incubation buffer (giving a final concentration of 2.5 U/ml). One unit (U) is defined as the amount of enzyme that will hydrolyze 1.0 nmol of ganglioside, GM1, per minute at 37 °C. Incubations are performed at 37 °C for 18 hours. The ceramide- glycanase-released oligosaccharides are then labelled with anthranilic acid and purified essentially as described in Anumula and Dhume, Glycobiology 8 (1998) 685-694 with the modifications described in Neville DC et al. Anal. Biochem. 2004 Aug 15;331(2):275-82. The purified 2-AA-labelled oligosaccharides are then separated by normal phase HPLC, as described in Neville DC et al., and glucose unit values are determined following comparison with a 2-AA-labelled glucose oligomer ladder (derived from a partial hydrolysate of dextran) external standard. Inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis are identified by measuring the decrease in GSL levels observed in the presence of the inhibitor. A similar assay method is described in Mellor HR Biochem. J. 2004 Aug l;381(Pt 3):861-6. That document describes the synthesis of a series of DNJ analogues to study their inhibitory activity in cultured HL60 cells. When the cells are treated for 16 hours at non-cytotoxic concentrations of DNJ analogue, a 40-50% decrease in GSL levels can be observed by HPLC analysis of GSL-derived oligosaccharides following ceramide glycanase digestion of GSL and 2-aminobenzamide labelling of the released
oligosaccharides.
Hayashi Y. et al, Anal. Biochem. 2005 Oct 15;345(2): 181-6 reports an HPLC- based method that uses fluorescent acceptors and nonradioisotope UDP-sugar donors to provide a fast, sensitive and reproducible assay to determine glucosylceramide synthase (GlcT) and lactosylceramide synthase (GalT) activities. Thus, inhibitors of
glycosphingolipid biosynthesis for use in accordance with the present invention can be identified by incubating and or growing cells in culture in the presence of the putative inhibitor, and applying the assay method described in Hayashi et al. The HPLC-based assay procedures described in Hayashi et al. involve mixing a fluorescent acceptor substrate, either 50pmol of C6-NBD-Cer or C6-NBD-GlcCer, and 6.5 nmol of lecithin in 100 μπιοΐ of ethanol, and then evaporating the solvent. Next 10 μΐ of water is added and the mixture is sonicated to form liposomes. For the GlcT assay, 50 μΐ of reaction mixture contains 500 μΜ UDP-Glc, ImM EDTA, 10 μΐ C6-NBD-Cer liposome and 20 μΐ of an appropriate amount of enzyme in lysis buffer 1. For the GalT assay, 50 μΐ of mixture contains 100 μΜ UDP-Gal, 5mM MgCl2, 5mM MnCb, 10 μΐ C6- BD-GlcCer liposome, and 20 μΐ of an appropriate amount of enzyme in lysis buffer 2. The assays are carried out at 37 °C for 1 hour. The reaction is stopped by adding 200 μΐ of chloroform/methanol (2: 1, v/v). After a few seconds of vortexing, 5 μΐ of 500 μΜ KC1 is added and then centrifuged. After the organic phase has dried up, lipids are dissolved in 200 μΐ of isopropyl alcohol/«- hexane/H20 (55:44: 1) and then transferred to a glass vial in an autosampler. A 100 μΐ aliquot sample is then loaded onto a normal-phase column and eluted with isopropyl alcohol/«-hexane/H20 (55:44: 1) for the GlcT assay or isopropyl alcohol/«- hexane/H20/phosphoric acid (110:84:5.9:0.1) for the GalT assay at a flow rate of 2.0 ml/min. Fluorescence can be determined using a fluorescent detector set to excitation and emission wavelengths of 470 and 530 nm, respectively. Fluorescent peaks are identified by comparing their retention times with those of standards.
Further assays include fluorescent-activated cells sorting (FACS) with
glycosphingolipid-binding proteins such as anti-glycosphingolipid antibodies or lectins (see for example Rouquette-Jazdanian et al., The Journal of Immunology, 2005, 175:
5637-5648 and Chefalo, P et al., Biochemistry 2006, Mar 21; 45(11): 3733-9).
Sandhoff et al. (J. Biol. Chem., vol. 277, no. 23, 20386-20398, 2002 and J. Biol. Chem., vol. 280, no. 29, 27310-27318, 2005) describe assay methods in which
glycosphingolipids are analysed by mass spectrometry or by TLC. Inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis for use in accordance with the present invention can be identified by incubating and or growing cells in culture in the presence of the putative inhibitor, and applying the TLC assay method or mass spectrometry assay method described by Sandhoff et al. Further details of these methods are given below.
In the methods described by Sandhoff et al. (J. Biol. Chem., vol. 277, no. 23,
20386-20398, 2002 and J. Biol. Chem., vol. 280, no. 29, 27310-27318, 2005) the glycosphingolipid profiles in mice were measured by nano-electrospray ionization tandem mass spectrometry (nano-ESI-MS/MS). Glycosphingolipids were first extracted from murine tissue for mass spectrometric analysis. The samples prepared included both the extracted GSLs and synthesised GSL MS standards. Nano-ESI-MS/MS analyses were performed with a triple quadropole instrument equipped with a nano-electrospray source operating at an estimated flow rate of 20-50 nl/min. Usually 10 μΙ_, of sample, dissolved in methanol or methanolic ammonium acetate (5 mM), was filled into a gold- sputtered capillary, which was positioned at a distance of 1-3 mm in front of the cone. The source temperature was set to 30 °C and the spray was started by applying 800-1200 V to the capillary. For each spectrum 20-50 scans of 15-30 s duration were averaged. The resulting Nano-ESI-MS/MS data could then be evaluated for quantification of the GSLs as follows: Quantitative spectra were measured with an average mass resolution of 1200 (ion mass/full width half maximum). Peak height values of the first mono-isotopic peak of each compound were taken for evaluation. A linear trend was calculated from the peak intensities of the corresponding internal standard lipids. The obtained calibration curve represented the intensity of the internal standard amount at a given m/z value. The quantities of the individual species of a GSL were calculated using a corrected intensity ratio (sample GSL/internal standard trend), knowing the amount of the internal standard added. The amount of the GSL was then calculated from the sum of the individual molecular species.
Sandhoff et al. (J. Biol. Chem., vol. 277, no. 23, 20386-20398, 2002 and J. Biol. Chem., vol. 280, no. 29, 27310-27318, 2005) also describe a procedure for analysing GSLs using TLC. Glycosphingolipids were extracted from murine tissue for analysis by TLC. Neutral and acidic GSL fractions were each taken up in 100 μΐ^
chloroform/methanol/water (10: 10: 1). Aliquots were then spotted on TLC plates with a Linomat IV from CAM AG (Muttenz, CH). A pre-run was performed with
chloroform/alcohol (1 : 1). The plates were then dried and the GSLs were separated with the running solvent chloroform, methanol, 0.2% aqueous CaCh (60:35:8). GSL bands were detected with orcinol/sulphuric acid spray reagent at 110 °C for 10 to 20 mins and the GSLs were identified by comparison with GSL standards.
TLC assays for analysing glycosphingolipid biosynthesis are also described in
Piatt, F.M. et al., J. Biol. Chem., vol. 269, issue 11, 8362-8365 and 1994; Piatt, F.M. et al., J. Biol. Chem., vol. 269, issue 43, 27108-27114, 1994.
The inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed in the present invention may be an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis of the following formula (I):
Figure imgf000032_0001
wherein:
X is O, S or NR5; R5 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-2o heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene- C3-20 heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-0-C3-2o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-20 heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-25 cycloalkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C3-20 heterocyclyl, or R5 forms, together with R1, R11, R4 or R14, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene wherein R' is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl;
n is 0 or 1;
Y is O, S or CR6R16;
R1, R11, R4 and R14, which may be the same or different, are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, provided that one of R1, R11, R4 and R14 may form, together with R5, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene; and
R2, R12, R3, R13, R6 and R16, which may be the same or different, are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted -O-Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In the compounds of formula (I), typically either R1 or R11 (more typically R11) is H. Typically, either R2 or R12 (more typically R12) is H. Typically, either R3 or R13 (more typically R13) is H. Typically, either R4 or R14 (more typically R14) is H. Typically, where Y is CR6R16, either R6 or R16 (more typically R16) is H.
Typically, R1 or R11 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, -O- C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl. More typically, R11 is hydrogen and R1 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O- C3-20 heterocyclyl.
Typically, when R1 or R11 is Ci-20 alkoxy, said Ci-20 alkoxy group is substituted with an ester group or an aryl group, for instance with -C(0)OCH3 or Ph.
Typically, when R1 or R11 is an aryloxy group, the aryl group bonded to the oxygen of said aryloxy is either substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, or substituted or unsubstituted naphthyl. Typically, the phenyl or naphthyl is either unsubstituted or monosubstituted with halo or methoxy.
When R1 or R11 is a substituted Ci-20 alkyl group, the substituent may be a hydroxyl, phosphate ester or phosphonate ester group. For instance, R1 or R11 may be CH2OH or a group of the following formula (VII):
Figure imgf000034_0001
wherein L is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene; x is 0 or 1; y is 0 or 1; A is CUR'" and R is H, Ci-20 alkyl, C3-20 heterocyclyl, C3-25 cycloalkyl, aryl or Ci-20 alkoxy, wherein R'" is hydroxyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy or acyl. Typically R'" is hydroxyl. Typically R is either -OCH3 or a heterocyclic group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000034_0002
Typically, both R1 and R11 are groups of formula (VII) above. An example of a compound in which both R1 and R11 are groups of formula (VII) is cytidin-5'-yl sialylethylphosphonate.
Typically, when R1 or R11 is unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, it is a methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl or decyl group.
Typically, when R1 or R11 is -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl, the cycloalkyl group is a group derived from a compound of one of the following formulae, which compound may be substituted or unsubstituted:
Figure imgf000035_0001
The term "group derived from a compound" in this case means that the group is a monovalent moiety obtained by removing a hydrogen atom from a carbon atom of the compound. An example of a compound in which R1 or R11 is -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl is Soyasaponin I, in which R1 or R11 has the followin structure:
Figure imgf000035_0002
Typically, when R1 or R11 is -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, said heterocyclyl group is a group derived from a monosaccharide in cyclic form, for instance a group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000035_0003
wherein x is 0 or 1; z is CHR84; and R80, R81, R82, R83 and R84, which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido. The term "group derived from" in this case means that the group is a monovalent moiety obtained by removing the R80, R81, R82, R83 or R84 atom from a carbon atom of the above compound.
More typically, when R1 or R11 is -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, said -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl group is a group of any one of the following structures
Figure imgf000035_0004
and in which R51 is a substituted or unsubstituted C1-10 alkyl group, typically methyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, typically a phenyl or naphthyl group. The phenyl or naphthyl may be unsubstituted or substituted. When substituted, the phenyl or naphthyl is typically substituted with a halo group, for instance with a bromo group. R52 is typically hydroxyl, Ci-io alkoxy, acyloxy, aryloxy or acylamido. Typically, R52 is -OH or - HC(0)Me.
In the compounds of formula (I), typically either R2 or R12 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, acylamido, Ci-20 alkoxy, Ci-20 alkyl and -O-C3-20
heterocyclyl. More typically, R12 is hydrogen and R2 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, Ci-20 alkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl.
Typically, when R2 or R12 is acylamido, said acylamido is - HC(0)CH3.
Typically, when R2 or R12 is acyloxy, said acyloxy is selected from
-OC(0)CH3, -OC(0)CH2CH3, -OC(0)CH2CH2CH3 and -OC(0)CH2CH2CH2CH3. More typically, when R2 or R12 is acyloxy, said acyloxy is -OC(0)CH2CH2CH3.
Typically, when R2 or R12 is -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, said heterocyclyl group is a group derived from a monosaccharide in cyclic form, for instance a group of the following structur
Figure imgf000036_0001
wherein x is 0 or 1; z is CHR84; and R80, R81, R82, R83 and R84, which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci- 6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido and a group derived from a second group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000036_0002
in which second group x is 0 or 1; z is CHR ; and R , R , R , R and R , which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido. The term "group derived from" in this case means that the group is a monovalent moiety obtained by removing the R80, R81, R82, R83 or R84 atom or group from a carbon atom of the compound. Thus when R2 or R12 is -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, said heterocyclyl group may be a group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000037_0001
wherein each of the ring carbon atoms is independently unsubstituted or substituted with Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-io alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido. An example of a compound in which R2 or R12 is -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl is Soyasaponin I, in which R2 or R12 is a group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000037_0002
Typically, when R2 or R12 is Ci-20 alkoxy or Ci-20 alkyl, the group is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy or hexoxy.
More typically, R2 or R12 is selected from H, OH, -OC(0)CH2CH2CH3 and HC(0)CH3. In another embodiment, R2 or R12 is selected from H and OH.
In the compounds of formula (I), typically either R3 or R13 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, acylamido, Ci-20 alkoxy and Ci-2o alkyl. More typically, R13 is hydrogen and R3 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci-2o alkoxy and Ci-2o alkyl.
Typically, when R3 or R13 is acylamido, said acylamido is - HC(0)CH3.
Typically, when R3 or R13 is acyloxy, said acyloxy is selected from
-OC(0)C¾, -OC(0)CH2CH3, -OC(0)CH2CH2CH3 and -OC(0)CH2CH2CH2CH3. More typically, when R3 or R13 is acyloxy, said acyloxy is -OC(0)CH2CH2CH3.
Typically, when R3 or R13 is Ci-2o alkoxy or Ci-2o alkyl, the group is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy or hexoxy.
More typically, R3 or R13 is selected from H, OH and HC(0)CH3. In another embodiment, R3 or R13 is selected from H and OH.
In the compounds of formula (I), typically either R4 or R14 is hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, carboxyl, ester or Ci-2o alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, or R4 or R14 forms, together with R5, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group. More typically, R14 is hydrogen and R4 is hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, carboxyl, ester or Ci-20 alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, or R4 forms, together with R5, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group.
Typically, when R4 or R14 is acyloxy, said acyloxy is selected from -OC(0)CH3, -
OC(0)CH2CH3, -OC(0)CH2CH2CH3 and -OC(0)CH2CH2CH2CH3.
Typically, when R4 or R14 is a Ci-2o alkyl, said Ci-2o alkyl is substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl, acyloxy, thiol and -SC(0)R95, wherein R95 is Ci-6 alkyl. More typically, said Ci-2o alkyl is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl substituted with one, two, three or four groups respectively, which groups are selected from hydroxyl, acyloxy and thiol, more typically from hydroxyl and thiol.
Typically, when R4 or R14 forms, together with R5, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, said alkylene group is substituted or unsubstituted propylene.
Typically, said propylene is unsubstituted or substituted with a C1-4 alkyl group, for instance with a methyl group. Examples of compounds of formula (I) in which R4 or R14 forms, together with R5, a methyl- substituted propylene group are Castanospermine and MDL25874, whose structures are given below.
R4 or R14 is typically H, -CH2OH, -CH2SH, -CH(OH)CH(OH)CH2OH or -COOH or R4 or R14 forms, together with R5, a propylene group substituted with a methyl group.
In the compounds of formula (I), typically n is 1, Y is CR6R16 and either R6 or R16 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, amino, Ci-2o alkoxy and Ci-2o alkyl. More typically, n is 1, Y is CR6R16, R16 is hydrogen and R6 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, amino, Ci-2o alkoxy and Ci-2o alkyl.
Typically, when R6 or R16 is acyloxy, said acyloxy is selected from -OC(0)CH3, - OC(0)CH2CH3, -OC(0)CH2CH2CH3 and -OC(0)CH2CH2CH2CH3.
Typically, when R6 or R16 is Ci-2o alkoxy or Ci-2o alkyl, the group is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy or hexoxy.
Typically, R6 or R16 is selected from -OH and - H2.
Alternatively, n is 1 and Y is O or S. More typically, n is 1 and Y is O.
Alternatively, n is 0.
In the compounds of formula (I), typically R5 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkylene-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkylene-C3 -2o heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkylene- C3 -25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkylene-C3 -2o heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-O-C3-20 heterocyclyl or R5 forms, together with R1, R11, R4 or R14, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene wherein R' is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl.
Typically, when R5 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, the Ci-20 alkylene is interrtupted once by O and the C3-25 cycloalkyl is Adamantyl, and thus R5 is -(Ci-10 alkylene)-0-CH2-Adamantyl. This includes, for instance, -(CH2)5-0-CH2- Adamantyl.
Typically, when R5 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, said Ci-20 alkylene is unsubstituted, and is, for instance, an unsubstituted C1-4 alkylene group, for example ethylene. Typically, when R5 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-0-C3 -20 heterocyclyl, said C3 -20 heterocyclyl is a group of the following formula (m):
Figure imgf000039_0001
wherein each Rm, which is the same or different, is independently selected from Ci- 6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci- io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido. More typically, when R5 is substituted or
unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, said C3-20 heterocyclyl is a group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000039_0002
Alternatively, R5 may be substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-20 heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3 -20 heterocyclyl or substituted or unsubstituted C3-25 cycloalkyl. Thus, R5 may be substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or substituted or unsubstituted cyclohexyl, for example. In the compounds of formula (I), typically X is NR5, and R5 forms, together with R4 or R14 (typically R4), a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, or R5 is selected from hydrogen, unsubstituted or substituted Ci-20 alkyl which is optionally interrupted by O, and a group of the following formula (VIII)
Figure imgf000040_0001
in which:
R40 and R42, which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted phenyl;
R41 is H, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, -CH=CHR44, or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene wherein R' is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl;
R43 is H, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or -C(0)R47;
R44 is H or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene;
R47 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene; and
L40 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-10 alkylene.
Typically, R40 is H. Typically, R42 is H. Typically, R43 is H or -C(0)R47. More typically, R43 is -C(0)R47. Typically, R47 is unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl. R47 may be, for instance, C7H15 (as in eliglustat), C9H19 (as in PDMP) or C15H31 (as in the P4 compounds). Typically L40 is CH2. In one embodiment, R41 is -CH=CHR44 and R44 is unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl. In that embodiment, R44 may be, for instance, -C13H27. In another embodiment, R41 is a group of the following formula (Villa):
Figure imgf000040_0002
in which R is H, Ci-6 alkyl, phenyl or, together with R a bidentate group of the structure -0-alk-O-; R49 is H, Ci-6 alkyl, phenyl or, together with R48 a bidentate group of the structure -0-alk-O-, wherein alk is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene.
Typically, R48 is H or, together with R49 a bidentate group of the structure -O-CH2-CH2-O Typically, R is H, OH or, together with R a bidentate group of the structure -O-CH2- CH2-O-. Typically, R48 is H and R49 is either H or OH.
Typically, when R5 is Ci-20 alkyl optionally interrupted by O, R5 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, methyl-O-R90, ethyl-O-R90, propyl- O-R90, butyl-O-R90, pentyl-O-R90, hexyl-O-R90, heptyl-O-R90, octyl-O-R90, nonyl-O-R90 or decyl-O-R90 wherein R90 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl or adamantyl.
Typically, when R5 forms, together with R4 or R14, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, the alkylene group is substituted or unsubstituted propylene.
Typically, said propylene is unsubstituted or substituted with a C1-4 alkyl group, for instance with a methyl group. Examples of compounds of formula (I) in which R4 or R14 forms, together with R5, a methyl- substituted propylene group are Castanospermine and MDL25874, whose structures are given below.
Alternatively, X is O or S. More typically, X is O.
Typically, R12, R13, R14 and R16 are all H and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) b
Figure imgf000041_0001
wherein X is O, S or R5; Y is O, S or CHR6; n is 0 or 1; and R1, R2, R3, R4 R5, R6 and R11 are as defined above for formula (I).
In one embodiment, the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) and: X is NR5; n is 1; Y is CHR6; and R5 is selected from: hydrogen and unsubstituted or substituted Ci-20 alkyl which is optionally interrupted by O, or R5 forms, together with R4, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group.
Typically in this embodiment, R11 is H. Typically in this embodiment, R1, R2, R3 and R6, which may be the same or different, are independently selected from H, OH, acyloxy, and substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl. When said Ci-6 alkyl is substituted, it is typically substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy.
Typically, in this embodiment, R4 is either Ci-6 alkyl substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy, or R4 forms, together with R5, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group. For instance, R4 may be methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups respectively, which groups are selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy, more typically hydroxyl. R4 may be CH2OH. Alternatively R4 may be a group which, together with R5, is a substituted or unsubstituted propylene group.
Typically, in this embodiment, R2, R3 and R6 are all OH. Typically, in this embodiment R1 is selected from H, OH and Ci-6 alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy. For instance, R1 may be H, OH, unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl, which methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl are substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups respectively, which groups are selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy, more typically hydroxyl. More typically, R4 is H, OH, CH2OH or Ci-6 alkyl. In this embodiment, the modification of the iminosugar core with an N-alkyl chain such as a N-butyl group (as in NB-DNJ) or a N-nonyl group (as in NN-DNJ) is believed to be important for clinical applications. Thus, typically in this embodiment R5 is Ci-20 alkyl which is optionally interrupted by O. For instance, R5 may be methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, methyl-O-R90, ethyl-O-R90, propyl- O-R90, butyl-O-R90, pentyl-O-R90, hexyl-O-R90, heptyl-O-R90, octyl-O-R90, nonyl-O-R90 or decyl-O-R90 wherein R90 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl or adamantyl. Alternatively, R5, together with R4 is a substituted or unsubstituted Ci- 6 alkylene group. Typically, the alkylene group is substituted or unsubstituted propylene. Typically, said propylene is unsubstituted or substituted with a C1-4 alkyl group, for instance with a methyl group. Alternatively, R5 may be H. Typically, when R2 is acyloxy, said acyloxy is selected from -OC(0)CH3, -OC(0)CH2CH3, -OC(0)CH2CH2CH3 and - OC(0)CH2CH2CH2CH3. More typically, when R2 is acyloxy, said acyloxy is - OC(0)CH2CH2CH3. Alternatively, R5 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-2o alkylene-0-C3 - 2o heterocyclyl. More typically, R5 is C1-4 alkylene-0-C3 -2o heterocyclyl, wherein said C1-4 alkylene is unsubstituted and said C3 -2o heterocyclyl is a group of the following formula (m):
Figure imgf000042_0001
wherein each Rm, which are the same or different, is independently selected from Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-
10 )alkylamino, amido and acylamido. Even more typically, R5 is C1-4 alkylene-0-C3. ■20 heterocyclyl, wherein said C1-4 alkylene is unsubstituted and said C3-20 heterocyclyl is a group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000043_0001
In another embodiment, the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) and: X is NR5; Y is O or S; n is either 0 or 1; and R5 is selected from hydrogen and a group of the following formula (VIII):
Figure imgf000043_0002
in which R and R , which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted phenyl; R41 is H, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, -CH=CHR44, or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene wherein R' is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl; R43 is H, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or -C(0)R47; R44 is H or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene; R47 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, which Ci-20 alkyl is optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene; and L40 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-10 alkylene. Typically, R40 is H. Typically, R42 is H.
Typically, R43 is H or -C(0)R47. More typically, R43 is -C(0)R47. Typically, R47 is unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl. R47 may be, for instance, C7H15 (as in eliglustat), C9H19 (as in PDMP) or C15H31 (as in the P4 compounds). Typically L40 is CH2. In one embodiment, R41 is -CH=CHR44 and R44 is unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl. In that embodiment, R44 may be, for instance, -C13H27. Alternatively R41 is a group of the following formula (Villa):
Figure imgf000043_0003
(Villa)
in which R48 is H, Ci-6 alkyl, phenyl or, together with R49 a bidentate group of the structure -0-alk-O-; R49 is H, Ci-6 alkyl, phenyl or, together with R48 a bidentate group of the structure -0-alk-O-, wherein alk is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene. Typically, R is H or, together with R a bidentate group of the structure -O-CH2-CH2-O-.
Typically, R49 is H, OH or, together with R48 a bidentate group of the structure -O-CH2- CH2-O-. Typically, R48 is H and R49 is either H or OH. Typically in this embodiment, R11 is H. Typically in this embodiment, R1, R2, R3, R4 and R6, which may be the same or different, are independently selected from H, OH, acyloxy and Ci-6 alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl and acyloxy. More typically, in this embodiment, R1, R2, R3, R4 and R6 are independently selected from H, OH and CH2OH. Typically, in this embodiment, Y is O. Examples of compounds of this embodiment include D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2-decanoylamino-3- morpholino- 1 -propanol (PDMP); D,L-threo- 1 -phenyl-2-hexadecanoylamino-3 - morpholino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3 -pyrrolidino- 1 - propanol (P4); 4'-hydroxy-D-threo-l-phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (4'-hydroxy-P4); 3',4'-ethylenedioxy-P4 (EtDO-P4); N-[(lR,2R)-l-(2,3-Dihydro-l,4- benzodioxin-6-yl)-l-hydroxy-3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat) and 2,5-dihydroxymethyl-3,4-dihydroxypyrrolidine (L-DMDP).
In another embodiment, the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) and: X is O or S; n is 1; Y is CHR6; R6 is H, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, Ci-10 alkylamino or di(Ci-io)alkylamino; R11 is H; R2 and R3, which may be the same or different, are independently selected from H, hydroxyl, Ci-20 alkoxy, acyloxy or acylamido; R4 is H, hydroxyl, acyloxy, thiol or Ci-20 alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl, acyloxy and thiol; and R1 is Ci-20 alkoxy, aryloxy or -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl is a group derived from a group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000044_0001
herein x is 0 or 1; z is CHR84; and R80, R81, R82, R83 and R84, which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, acyloxy, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido. Typically, in this embodiment, X is O. Examples of compounds of this embodiment are the Galactosyltransferase inhibitor compounds described in Chung SJ, Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 1998 Dec l;8(23):3359-64, whose structures are given hereinbelow.
Typically, in this embodiment, R1 is a group of any one of the following structures:
Figure imgf000045_0001
and , in which
R51 is a substituted or unsubstituted C1-10 alkyl group, typically methyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, typically a phenyl or naphthyl group. The phenyl or naphthyl may be unsubstituted or substituted. When substituted, the phenyl or naphthyl is typically substituted with a halo group, for instance with a bromo group. R52 is typically hydroxyl, Ci-io alkoxy, acyloxy, aryloxy or acylamido. Typically, R52 is -OH or - HC(0)Me.
Alternatively, in this embodiment, R1 may be C1 -20 alkoxy wherein said C1 -20 alkoxy group is substituted with an ester group or an aryl group, for instance with - C(0)OCH3 or Ph. Alternatively, in this embodiment, R1 may be aryloxy wherein the aryl group bonded to the oxygen of said aryloxy is either substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, or substituted or unsubstituted naphthyl. Typically, the phenyl or naphthyl is either unsubstituted or monosubstituted with halo or methoxy.
Typically, in this embodiment, R6 is H, amino or hydroxyl, more typically, amino or hydroxyl. Typically, in this embodiment, R2 is H, hydroxyl or - HC(0)CH3, more typically hydroxyl or - HC(0)CH3. Typically, in this embodiment, R3 is H or hydroxyl, more typically hydroxyl. Typically, in this embodiment, R4 is H, CH2OH or CH2SH, more typically CH2OH or CH2SH.
In another embodiment, the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is of formula (la) and:
X is O or S; n is 1; Y is CHR6; R6 is H, hydroxyl, acyloxy or Ci-20 alkoxy;
R1 and R11 which may be the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-20 alkyl, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy, carboxyl, ester, -0-C3-25 cycloalkyl, and a group of the following formula (VII):
Figure imgf000045_0002
(VII) wherein L is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene; x is 0 or 1 ; y is 0 or 1 ; A is CHR'" and R is H, Ci-20 alkyl, C3-20 heterocyclyl, C3-25 cycloalkyl, aryl or Ci-20 alkoxy, wherein R'" is hydroxyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy or acyl;
R2 is H, Ci-20 alkyl, hydroxyl, acyloxy or -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl is a group derived from a group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000046_0001
wherein x is 0 or 1 ; z is CHR84; and R80, R81, R82, R83 and R84, which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci- 6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido and a group derived from a second group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000046_0002
in which second group x is 0 or 1 ; z is CHR ; and R , R , R , R and R , which are the same or different, are independently selected from H, Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido;
R3 is H, hydroxyl, acyloxy, Ci-20 alkoxy or acylamido; and
R4 is H, carboxyl, ester or Ci-20 alkyl which is unsubstituted or substituted with one, two, three or four groups selected from hydroxyl and thiol.
Examples of compounds of this embodiment are sialic acid, cytidin-5 '-yl sialylethylphosphonate and Soyasaponin I.
Typically, in this embodiment, X is O.
Typically, in this embodiment, R6 is H or hydroxyl, more typically hydroxyl.
Typically, in this embodiment, R1 and R11 are independently selected from H, hydroxyl, carboxyl, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and a group of formula (VII) in which L60 is ethylene or methylene, R'" is hydroxyl, and R is either -OCH3 or a heterocyclic group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000046_0003
. Both R1 and R11 may be groups of formula (VII). When R1 or R11 is -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl, the cycloalkyl group is a group derived from a compound of one of the following formulae, which compound may be substituted or unsubstituted:
Figure imgf000047_0001
typically, the cycloalk l group of said -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl is a group derived from the
Figure imgf000047_0002
following compound: . Typically, if either R1 or R11 is -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl, then the other one of those groups, i.e. R11 or R1 respectively, is H.
Typically, in this embodiment, R2 is H or -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl is a group of the following structure:
Figure imgf000047_0003
wherein each of the ring carbon atoms is independently unsubstituted or substituted with Ci-6 alkyl, OH, SH, Ci-6 alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido and acylamido. Typically, each of the ring carbon atoms is independently unsubstituted or substituted with OH, 0¾ΟΗ ΟΓ a Ci-6 alkyl group, for instance a methyl group.
Typically, in this embodiment, R3 is hydroxyl or acylamido. More typically, R3 is hydroxyl or NHC(0)CH3.
Typically, in this embodiment, R4 is carboxyl, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl, which methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl are substituted with one, two, three and four groups respectively, which groups are selected from hydroxyl and thiol. More typically, R4 is carboxyl or -CH(OH)CH(OH)CH2OH. Any of the following compounds of formula (I), and any pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the following compounds of formula (I), may be employed in the present invention:
• Iminosugars (azasugars) such as: N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), also known as miglustat or ZAVESCA®; N-nonyldeoxynojirimycin (NN-DNJ); N- butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ); N-5-adamantane-l-yl-methoxypentyl- deoxynojirimycin (AMP-DNJ); alpha-homogalactonojirimycin (HGJ); Nojirimycin (NJ); Deoxynojirimycin (DNJ); N7-oxadecyl-deoxynojirimycin;
deoxygalactonojirimycin (DGJ); N-butyl-deoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ); N- nonyl-deoxygalactonojirimycin (NN-DGJ); N-nonyl-6deoxygalactonojirimycin; N7-oxanonyl-6deoxy-DGJ; alpha-homoallonojirimycin (HAJ); beta-l-C-butyl- deoxygalactonojirimycin (CB-DGJ). Such compounds are glycosyltransferase inhibitors ("sugar mimics").
• D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2-decanoylamino-3-morpholino-l-propanol (PDMP); D,L- threo- 1 -phenyl-2-hexadecanoylamino-3 -mo holino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3 -pyrrolidino- 1 -propanol (P4); 4 ' -hy droxy-D-threo- 1 - phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (4'-hydroxy-P4); 3 ',4'- ethylenedioxy-P4 (EtDO-P4); N-[(1R,2R)- 1 -(2,3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 - hydroxy-3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat); 2,5- dihydroxymethyl-3,4-dihydroxypyrrolidine (L-DMDP). Such compounds are glycosyltransferase inhibitors and derivatives of sphingosine ("lipid mimics").
• Iminosugars such as Castanospermine and MDL25874, which have the following structures respectively:
Figure imgf000048_0001
• Sialyltransferase inhibitors such as N-acetylneuraminic acid (sialic acid); cytidin- 5'-yl sialylethylphosphonate; and Soyasaponin I.
• Galactosyltransferase inhibitor compounds of the following structures, which
compounds are described in Chung SJ, Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 1998 Dec l 8(23):3359-64:
Figure imgf000048_0002
Figure imgf000049_0001
Iminosugars, such as l,5-dideoxy-l,5-imino-D-glucitol, and their N-alkyl, N-acyl and N-aryl, and optionally O-acylated derivatives, such as: 1,5 -(Butylimino)- 1,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, also known as N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), miglustat or ZAVESCA®; l,5-(Methylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(Hexylimino)-l,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(Nonylylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(2- Ethylbutylimino)- 1 ,5 -dideoxy-D-glucitol; 1 ,5-(2-Methylpentylimino)- 1 ,5 -dideoxy- D-glucitol; l,5-(Benzyloxycarbonylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Phenylacetylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Benzoylimino)- 1,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Ethyl malonylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1,5- (Hexylimino)- 1 , 5 -dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1 , 5-(Nonylimino)- 1 , 5-dideoxy- D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Benzyloxycarbonylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraisobutyrate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetrabutyrate; 1,5- (Butylimino)- 1 , 5 -dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetrapropionate; 1 , 5-(Butylimino)- 1,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetrab enzoate; 1 , 5 -Dideoxy- 1 , 5 -imino-D-glucitol,
tetraisobutyrate; l,5-(Hydrocinnamoylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Methyl malonylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Butylimino)- 1,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraisobutyrate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-4R,6-0- (phenylmethylene)-D-glucitol, diacetate; l,5-[(Phenoxymethyl)carbonylimino]-l,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-[(Ethylbutyl)imino]-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1, 5 -(Butylimino)- 1,5 -dideoxy-D-glucitol, 2,3-diacetate; 1,5- (Hexylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-4R,6-0-(phenylmethylene)-D-glucitol, diacetate; 1,5- (Hexylimino)- 1,5 -dideoxy-D-glucitol, 2,3-diacetate; l,5-[(2-Methylpentyl)imino]- 1,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, 6- acetate; l,5-[(3-Nicotinoyl)imino]-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1,5- (Cinnamoylimino)- 1 , 5 -dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1 , 5 -(Butylimino)- 1,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, 2,3-dibutyrate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-4R,6-0- (phenylmethylene)-D-glucitol, 2,3-dibutyrate; l,5-(Phenylacetylimino)-l,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraisobutyrate; 1 , 5 - [(4-Chlorophenyl)acetylimino] -1,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-[(4-Biphenyl)acetylimino]-l,5-dideoxy-D- glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Benzyloxycarbonylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetrabutyrate; l,5-Dideoxy-l,5-imino-D-glucitol, tetrabutyrate; 3,4,5- piperidinetriol, l-propyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5- piperidinetriol, l-pentyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5- piperidinetriol, l-heptyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5- piperidinetriol, l-butyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3S, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, l-nonyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (1-ethyl) propyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (3-methyl) butyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (2-phenyl) ethyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (3-phenyl) propyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (1-ethyl) hexyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (2-ethyl) butyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, l-[(2R)-(2- methyl-2-phenyl) ethyl]-2-(hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5- piperidinetriol, l-[(2S)-(2-methyl-2-phenyl) ethyl]-2-(hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S), β-L-homofuconojirimycin; and propyl 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-4-O-( ?-D- galactopyranosyl)-3-O-(2-(/V-( ?-L-homofuconojirimycinyl))ethyl)-a-D- glucopyranoside.
• Iminosugars, such as ido-N-(5-adamantane-l-yl-methoxy-pentyl)deoxynojirimycin;
N-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-L-ido-deoxynojirimycin; N-(adamantane- 1 - yl-methoxypentyl)-D-galacto-deoxynojirimycin; C 1 -beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl- methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-methyl-C 1 -beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl- methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-butyl-C 1 -beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl- methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; 2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)- deoxynojirimycin; N-methyl-2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)- deoxynojirimycin; N-butyl-2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)- deoxynojirimycin; N-benzyloxycarbonyl-2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)- 3,4,6-tri-O-benzyl-deoxy-nojirimycin; and N-(5-adamantane-l-yl-methoxy- pentyl)deoxynojirimycin.
Methods of synthesizing such iminosugar compounds are known and are described, xample, in WO 02/055498 and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,622,972, 4,246,345, 4,266,025,5,714, and 4,806,650, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 07/851,818, filed Mar. 16, 1992, US 2007/0066581 and EP1528056. For example, N-nonyl-DNJ and N-decyl-DNJ can be conveniently prepared by the N-nonylation or N-decylation, respectively, of 1,5- dideoxy-l,5-imino-D-glucitol (DNJ) by methods analogous to the N-butylation of DNJ as described in Example 2 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,639,436 by substituting an equivalent amount of n-nonylaldehyde or n-decylaldehyde for n-butylraldehyde. The starting materials are readily available from many commercial sources.
Typically, the compound of formula (I) employed is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ). More typically, the compound of formula (Γ) is JVB-DNJ.
NB-DGJ is the galactose analogue of NB-DNJ. NB-DGJ inhibits GSL biosynthesis comparably to NB-DNJ but lacks certain side effect activities associated with NB-DNJ. There has been extensive use of NB-DGJ in mouse models of GSL storage diseases and it is very well tolerated. Thus, in one embodiment, the compound of formula (I) employed is NB-DGJ.
In one preferred embodiment, the compound of formula (I) employed is selected from: ido-N-(5-adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)deoxynojirimycin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl- methoxypentyl)-L-ido-deoxynojirimycin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-D-galacto- deoxynojirimycin; C 1 -beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N- methyl-C 1 -beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-butyl-C 1 -beta- (adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; 2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl- methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-methyl-2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)- deoxynojirimycin; N-butyl-2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N- benzyloxycarbonyl-2-0-(adamantane-l-yl-methoxypentyl)-3,4,6-tri-0-benzyl-deoxy- nojirimycin; and N-(5-adamantane-l-yl-methoxy-pentyl)deoxynojirimycin.
In another preferred embodiment the compound of formula (I) employed is selected from D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2-decanoylamino-3-mo holino-l-propanol (PDMP); D,L-threo- 1 -phenyl-2-hexadecanoylamino-3 -morpholino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2- palmitoilamino-3 -pyrrolidino- 1 -propanol (P4); 4' -hydroxy-D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2- palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (4'-hydroxy-P4); 3',4'-ethylenedioxy-P4 (EtDO- P4); N-[(1R,2R)- 1 -(2,3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-2- propanyljoctanamide (eliglustat); and 2,5-dihydroxymethyl-3,4-dihydroxypyrrolidine (L- DMDP). Typically, in this embodiment, the compound of formula (I) employed is N- [(1R,2R)- 1 -(2, 3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-2- propanyljoctanamide (eliglustat). Eliglustat may be employed in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat, for instance in the form of eliglustat tartrate.
Infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium
Tuberculosis is a global health problem affecting approximately one third of the world's population and resulting in three million deaths each year. One of the characteristic hallmarks of tuberculosis is the ability oiMtb to successfully survive within cells of the innate immune system including macrophages and monocytes.
Non-pathogenic mycobacteria, including Mycobacterium smegmatis, bind host cell- surface receptors and are ingested into phagosomes that subsequently mature and fuse with lysosomes, leading to destruction of the mycobacterium.
In contrast, pathogenic mycobacteria are not delivered to the lysosome due to the mycobacterium inhibiting phagosome-lysosome fusion. Multiple mechanisms have been proposed to explain the intracellular survival oiMtb, including phagosome maturation arrest, and defective acidification of the phagosome and inhibition of phosphatidylinositol-dependent trafficking pathways.
The present inventors have investigated whether there is a mechanistic link between pathogenic mycobacterial infection and the NPC pathway. The inventors unexpectedly found that pathogenic mycobacteria, including Mycobacterium tuberculosis, secrete lipids that inhibit the NPC pathway, promoting the intra-cellular survival of the mycobacteria in host macrophages. This link between the rare lysosomal storage disorder NPC and Mtb infection has important implications for understanding host-pathogen interactions and for developing new therapies to combat TB, particularly in the current era of antibiotic resistance.
The inventors found that treatment with a particular class of pharmacological agent that corrects defects in NPCl mutant cells, namely a SERCA antagonist, promotes mycobacterial clearance. Other classes of agent known to be useful against NPC disease, however, did not promote mycobacterial clearance by themselves, including an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis miglustat (NB-DNJ), and β-cyclodextrin. Furthermore, a structural analog of curcumin that does not function as SERCA antagonist was found not to promote clearance of the mycobacterium. The data herein support that the lipids secreted by the pathogenic mycobacteria inhibit the NPC pathway to achieve altered acidic store calcium homeostasis, that in turn blocks the ability of the lysosome to fuse and kill the mycobacterium, leading to persistence.
Despite the fact that the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis was found to be inactive on its own within the time frame of the experiment, it was unexpectedly found that inhibitors of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis show synergy when combined with a SERCA antagonist. Indeed, the combination of a SERCA antagonist (which elevates cytosolic calcium) and an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis showed significantly greater efficacy than the SERCA antagonist on its own and, of course, than the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis on its own which showed no activity. It is therefore a surprising finding of the present invention that a SERCA antagonist can advantageously be used in combination with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis in order to treat infections caused by pathogenic mycobacteria.
Infections caused by pathogenic mycobacteria can advantageously therefore be treated by the combination of a SERCA antagonist and an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
An infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium, which is treated in accordance with the present invention, is an infection caused by one or more pathogenic Mycobacteria. In other words, it is a pathogenic mycobacterial infection. Such infections include the infectious disease tuberculosis.
Accordingly, in one embodiment of the invention, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium is tuberculosis.
The pathogenic mycobacterium which most commonly causes tuberculosis in humans is Mycobacterium tuberculosis. However, other pathogenic mycobacteria, such as Mycobacterium bovis, Mycobacterium africanum, Mycobacterium cannetti, and
Mycobacterium microtti, also cause tuberculosis (although these species are less common in humans).
Thus, in one embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium bovis, Mycobacterium africanum, Mycobacterium cannetti or Mycobacterium microtti.
In a preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
In one preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infectious disease. Typically, the infectious disease is tuberculosis. Thus, the present invention provides a combination comprising a SERCA antagonist and an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, which combination is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
The invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a SERCA antagonist, an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, which composition is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
The invention also provides a SERCA antagonist, which SERCA antagonist is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, by
simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
The invention also provides an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, which inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with a SERCA antagonist.
The invention also provides a method of treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, which method comprises administering to a human or animal patient in need of such treatment an effective amount of a SERCA antagonist and an effective amount of an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
The invention also provides a kit of parts comprising a SERCA antagonist together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by Mycobacterium
tuberculosis.
The invention also provides a kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of
glycosphingolipid biosynthesis together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with a SERCA antagonist, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by
Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
The invention also provides a kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of
glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, a SERCA antagonist, and instructions for their
simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by Mycobacterium
tuberculosis. Preferably said patient is human.
Preferred combinations of agents
Typically, the SERC A antagonist employed in the present invention is selected from: curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed in the present invention is selected from an iminosugar, D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2- decanoylamino-3-morpholino-l-propanol (PDMP); D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2- hexadecanoylamino-3 -morpholino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2- palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (P4); 4'-hydroxy-D-threo-l-phenyl-2- palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (4'-hydroxy-P4); 3',4'-ethylenedioxy-P4 (EtDO- P4); N-[(1R,2R)- 1 -(2,3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-2- propanyljoctanamide (eliglustat); and 2,5-dihydroxymethyl-3,4-dihydroxypyrrolidine (L- DMDP), and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
For instance, the SERCA antagonist employed in the present invention may be selected from: curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed in the present invention may be selected from an iminosugar, N- [(1R,2R)- 1 -(2, 3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)-2- propanyljoctanamide (eliglustat), and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. An example of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat which may be employed is eliglustat tartrate.
More preferably, the SERCA antagonist is selected from curcumin, thapsigargin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
In an alternative preferable embodiment, the SERCA antagonist is selected from curcumin, thapsigargin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-[(lR,2R)-l-(2,3-Dihydro- l,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)-l-hydroxy-3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat. An example of a preferred
pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat is eliglustat tartrate.
In an even more preferred alternative embodiment, the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-[(lR,2R)-l-(2,3-Dihydro-l,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)-l- hydroxy-3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat. An example of a preferred pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat is eliglustat tartrate.
Even more preferably, the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
In a particularly preferred embodiment of the present invention, the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of
glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), N- butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In the most preferred embodiment of the invention, the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
When the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed in the present invention is an iminosugar, the iminosugar is typically a compound of formula (la) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
Figure imgf000056_0001
wherein X is NR5; n is 1; Y is CHR6; R11 is H;
R1 and R4, which may be the same or different, are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, substituted or unsubstituted C1-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C1-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted C1-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, C1-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, provided that one of R1 and R4 may form, together with R5, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene;
R2 and R3, which may be the same or different, are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted -O-Ci-20 alkylene- C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy, acyl, ester, acyloxy, Ci-10 alkylamino, di(Ci-io)alkylamino, amido, acylamido, -O-C3-25 cycloalkyl and -O-C3-20 heterocyclyl, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene; and
R5 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted
Ci-20 alkylene-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-2o heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene- C3-20 heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-O-C3-20 heterocyclyl or R5 forms, together with R1 or R4, a substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkylene group, wherein said Ci-20 alkyl and Ci-20 alkylene are optionally interrupted by N(R'), O, S or arylene wherein R' is H, Ci-6 alkyl or aryl; and
R6 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, acyloxy, amino, substituted or
unsubstituted Ci-20 alkoxy and substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkyl.
Typically, when R1, R4 or R5 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, the Ci-20 alkylene is interrtupted once by O and the C3-25 cycloalkyl is
Adamantyl, and thus the R1, R4 or R5 is -(Ci-10 alkylene)-0-CH2-Adamantyl. This includes, for instance, -(CH2)5-0-CH2-Adamantyl.
Similarly, when R2 or R3 is substituted or unsubstituted -O-Ci-20 alkylene-C3-25 cycloalkyl, the Ci-20 alkylene is often interrtupted once by O and the C3-25 cycloalkyl is Adamantyl, and thus the R2 or R3 is -0-(Ci-io alkylene)-0-CH2- Adamantyl. This includes, for instance, -0-(CH2)5-0-CH2-Adamantyl.
The iminosugar may for instance be selected from:
N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), also known as miglustat or ZAVESCA®; N- nonyldeoxynojirimycin (NN-DNJ); N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ); N-5- adamantane-l-yl-methoxypentyl-deoxynojirimycin (AMP-DNJ); alpha- homogalactonojirimycin (HGJ); Nojirimycin (NJ); Deoxynojirimycin (DNJ); N7- oxadecyl-deoxynojirimycin; deoxygalactonojirimycin (DGJ); N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ); N-nonyl-deoxygalactonojirimycin (NN-DGJ); N- nonyl-6deoxygalactonojirimycin; N7-oxanonyl-6deoxy-DGJ; alpha- ho moallonojirimycin (HAJ); beta-l-C-butyl-deoxygalactonojirimycin (CB-DGJ); Castanospermine;
MDL25874; l,5-dideoxy-l,5-imino-D-glucitol, and their N-alkyl, N-acyl and N-aryl, and optionally O-acylated derivatives; l,5-(Methylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; 1,5- (Hexylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(Nonylylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; l,5-(2- Ethylbutylimino)- 1 ,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol; 1 ,5-(2-Methylpentylimino)- 1 ,5-dideoxy-D- glucitol; l,5-(Benzyloxycarbonylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1,5- (Phenylacetylimino)- 1 , 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1 , 5-(Benzoylimino)- 1,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1,5 (Ethyl malonylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Hexylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy- D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Nonylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1,5- (Benzyloxycarbonylimino)- 1 , 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraisobutyrate; 1 ,5-(Butylimino)- 1,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetrabutyrate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol,
tetrapropionate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetrabenzoate; l,5-Dideoxy-l,5- imino-D-glucitol, tetraisobutyrate; l,5-(Hydrocinnamoylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Methyl malonylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1,5- (Butylimino)- 1 , 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraisobutyrate; 1 ,5-(Butylimino)- 1 ,5-dideoxy-4R,6 0-(phenylmethylene)-D-glucitol, diacetate; l,5-[(Phenoxymethyl)carbonylimino]-l,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-[(Ethylbutyl)imino]-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1, 5 -(Butylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, 2,3-diacetate; l,5-(Hexylimino)-l,5 dideoxy-4R,6-0-(phenylmethylene)-D-glucitol, diacetate; l,5-(Hexylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy- D-glucitol, 2,3-diacetate; l,5-[(2-Methylpentyl)imino]-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1, 5 -(Butylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, 6-acetate; l,5-[(3- Nicotinoyl)imino] - 1 , 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1 , 5 -(Cinnamoylimino)- 1,5- dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, 2,3-dibutyrate; l,5-(Butylimino)-l,5-dideoxy-4R,6-0-(phenylmethylene)-D-glucitol, 2,3-dibutyrate; 1,5- (Phenylacetylimino)-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraisobutyrate; l,5-[(4- Chlorophenyl)acetylimino]-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; l,5-[(4- Biphenyl)acetylimino]-l, 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetraacetate; 1,5-
(Benzyloxycarbonylimino)- 1 , 5-dideoxy-D-glucitol, tetrabutyrate; 1 , 5-Dideoxy- 1 , 5-imino- D-glucitol, tetrabutyrate; 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, l-propyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, l-pentyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5- piperidinetriol, l-heptyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- butyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3S, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, l-nonyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol,l- (1-ethyl) propyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (3 -methyl) butyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (2-phenyl) ethyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (3-phenyl) propyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol,l- (1-ethyl) hexyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, 1- (2-ethyl) butyl-2- (hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, l-[(2R)-(2-methyl-2-phenyl) ethyl]-2-(hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S); 3,4,5-piperidinetriol, l-[(2S)-(2-methyl-2- phenyl) ethyl]-2-(hydroxymethyl)-, (2S, 3R, 4R, 5S), β-L-homofuconojirimycin; and propyl 2-acetamido-2-deoxy-4-O-(yff-D-galactopyranosyl)-3-O-(2-(iV-(yff-L- homofuconojirimycinyl))ethyl)-a-D-glucopyranoside; ido-N-(5-adamantane-l-yl- methoxy-pentyl)deoxynoj irimy cin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-L-ido- deoxynojirimycin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-D-galacto-deoxynoj irimy cin; C 1 - beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-methyl-C 1 -beta- (adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-butyl-C 1 -beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl- methoxypentyl)-deoxynoj irimy cin; 2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)- deoxynoj irimy cin; N-methyl-2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)-deoxynoj irimy cin; N-butyl-2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-benzyloxycarbonyl 2-0-(adamantane-l-yl-methoxypentyl)-3,4,6-tri-0-benzyl-deoxy-nojirimycin; and N-(5- adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)deoxynoj irimy cin
The iminosugar is preferably however selected from N-butyldeoxynoj irimy cin (NB-DNJ), N-butyldeoxygalactonoj irimy cin (NB-DGJ), ido-N-(5-adamantane-l-yl- methoxy-pentyl)deoxynoj irimy cin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-L-ido- deoxynoj irimy cin; N-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-D-galacto-deoxynoj irimy cin; C 1 - beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-methyl-C 1 -beta- (adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-butyl-C 1 -beta-(adamantane- 1 -yl- methoxypentyl)-deoxynoj irimy cin; 2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxypentyl)- deoxynoj irimy cin; N-methyl-2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)-deoxynoj irimy cin; N-butyl-2-0-(adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)-deoxynojirimycin; N-benzyloxycarbonyl 2-0-(adamantane-l-yl-methoxypentyl)-3,4,6-tri-0-benzyl-deoxy-nojirimycin; and N-(5- adamantane- 1 -yl-methoxy-pentyl)deoxynojirimycin.
Even more prefererably, the iminosugar is N-butyldeoxynoj irimy cin (NB-DNJ) or N-butyldeoxygalactonoj irimy cin (NB-DGJ).
Most preferably, the iminosugar is N-butyldeoxynoj irimy cin (NB-DNJ), which is also known as miglustat and ZAVESCA®.
NB-DGJ may also be preferred, however, due to its advantageous side effect profile. Thus, in another highly preferred embodiment the iminosugar is NB-DGJ.
Preferred treatments by preferred combinations
In a preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis; the SERCA antagonist employed is selected from: curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed is selected from an iminosugar, D,L- threo- 1 -phenyl-2-decanoylamino-3 -morpholino- 1 -propanol (PDMP); D,L-threo- 1 -phenyl-2- hexadecanoylamino-3 -morpholino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo-l-phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3- pyrrolidino-1 -propanol (P4); 4'-hydroxy-D-threo-l-phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l- propanol (4'-hydroxy-P4); 3',4'-ethylenedioxy-P4 (EtDO-P4); N-[(lR,2R)-l-(2,3-Dihydro-
1.4- benzodioxin-6-yl)-l-hydroxy-3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat); and
2.5- dihydroxymethyl-3,4-dihydroxypyrrolidine (L-DMDP), and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
In an even more preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by
Mycobacterium tuberculosis; the SERCA antagonist employed is selected from: curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis employed is selected from an iminosugar, N-[(1R,2R)- 1 -(2,3 -Dihydro- 1 ,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)- 1 -hydroxy-3 -( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)- 2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
For instance, in one preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic
mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis; the SERCA antagonist is selected from curcumin, thapsigargin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or eliglustat or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar or eliglustat.
Thus, in a preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis; the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
In another preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis; the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is eliglustat or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat. The pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat may be eliglustat tartrate. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by
Mycobacterium tuberculosis; the SERCA antagonist is selected from curcumin, thapsigargin and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
In an even more preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by
Mycobacterium tuberculosis; the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N- butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Thus, in one more preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic
mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis; the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In the most preferred embodiment, the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium which is treated in accordance with the present invention is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis; the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Thus, the present invention provides a combination comprising curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, which combination is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
The invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, which composition is for use in the treatment of an infection caused by
Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
The invention also provides curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with N- butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
The invention also provides N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for use in the treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential coadministration with curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
The invention also provides a method of treatment of an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, which method comprises administering to a human or animal patient in need of such treatment an effective amount of curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and an effective amount of N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Preferably said patient is human.
The invention also provides a kit of parts comprising curcumin or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB- DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by Mycobacterium
tuberculosis.
Preferably said patient is human.
The invention also provides a kit of parts comprising N-butyldeoxynojirimycin
(NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
Preferably said patient is human.
The invention also provides a kit of parts comprising N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and instructions for their simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
Preferably said patient is human. Administration details
The active compounds employed in the method of the invention, i.e. the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, may be administered together in the same pharmaceutical composition. Alternatively, they may be administered in different compositions, and the different compositions may be administered separately, simultaneously, concomitantly or sequentially, and by the same route or by a different route.
Whether they are administered together in the same composition, or in different compositions, the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis can be administered in a variety of dosage forms, for example orally such as in the form of tablets, capsules, sugar- or film-coated tablets, liquid solutions or suspensions or parenterally, for example intramuscularly, intravenously or subcutaneously. The
compounds may therefore be given by injection or infusion.
Whether they are administered together in the same composition, or in different compositions, the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis may be presented for administration in a liposome. Thus, either or both compounds may be encapsulated or entrapped in a liposome and then administered to the patient to be treated. Active ingredients encapsulated by liposomes may reduce toxicity, increase efficacy, or both. Notably, liposomes are thought to interact with cells by stable absorption, endocytosis, lipid transfer, and fusion (R.B. Egerdie et al., 1989, J. Urol. 142:390).
The dosages of the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis may be the same or different from one another and depend on a variety of factors including the age, weight and condition of the patient and the route of
administration. Daily dosages can vary within wide limits and will be adjusted to the individual requirements in each particular case. Typically, however, the dosage of the SERCA antagonist, adopted for each route of administration, when the compound is coadministered with the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis to adult humans, is 0.0001 to 50 mg/kg, most commonly in the range of 0.001 to 10 mg/kg, body weight, for instance 0.01 to 1 mg/kg. Such a dosage may be given, for example, from 1 to 5 times daily. For intravenous injection a suitable daily dose is from 0.0001 to 1 mg/kg body weight, preferably from 0.0001 to 0.1 mg/kg body weight. A daily dosage can be administered as a single dosage or according to a divided dose schedule. Similarly, the dosage of the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, adopted for each route of administration, when the compound is co-administered with the SERCA antagonist to adult humans, is typically 0.0001 to 50 mg/kg, most commonly in the range of 0.001 to 10 mg/kg, body weight, for instance 0.01 to 1 mg/kg. Such a dosage may be given, for example, from 1 to 5 times daily. For intravenous injection a suitable daily dose is from 0.0001 to 1 mg/kg body weight, preferably from 0.0001 to 0.1 mg/kg body weight. A daily dosage can be administered as a single dosage or according to a divided dose schedule.
Typically the doses of each active agent (i.e. the dose of the SERCA antagonist and the dose of the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis), which may be the same or different, to treat human patients range from about 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg of the compound, more typically from about 10 mg to about 1000 mg of the compound. A typical dose may be about 100 mg to about 300 mg of the compound. A dose may be administered once a day (QID), twice per day (BID), or more frequently, depending on the pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic properties, including absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion of the particular compound. In addition, toxicity factors may influence the dosage and administration regimen. When administered orally, the pill, capsule, or tablet may be ingested daily or less frequently for a specified period of time. The regimen may be repeated for a number of cycles of therapy.
The proportions in which (a) the SERCA antagonist and (b) the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis may be used according to the invention are variable. Active substances (a) and (b) may possibly be present in the form of their solvates or hydrates, or in any of various salt forms. Depending on the choice of the compounds (a) and (b), and the forms of those compounds (e.g. salt form, solvated, hydrated), the weight ratios which may be used within the scope of the present invention vary on the basis of the different molecular weights. The pharmaceutical combinations according to the invention may for instance contain (a) and (b) generally in a ratio by weight (b):(a) ranging from 1 : 500 to 500: 1, preferably from 1 : 100 to 100: 1, for instance from 1 : 10 to 10: 1.
The SERCA antagonist and/or the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis compound may be formulated for use as a pharmaceutical composition also comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent. Such compositions are typically prepared following conventional methods and are administered in a pharmaceutically suitable form. The SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, may be administered together in the same pharmaceutical composition. Alternatively, they may be administered in different compositions, and the different compositions may be
administered separately, simultaneously, concomitantly or sequentially, and by the same route or by a different route. Thus, either or both compounds may be administered in any conventional form and route, for instance as follows:
A) Orally, for example, as tablets, coated tablets, dragees, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, liquid solutions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsions, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs. Compositions intended for oral use may be prepared according to any method known in the art for the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions and such compositions may contain one or more agents selected from the group consisting of sweetening agents, flavouring agents, colouring agents and preserving agents in order to provide pharmaceutically elegant and palatable preparations.
Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipients which are suitable for the manufacture of tablets. These excipients may be for example, inert diluents, such as calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, dextrose, saccharose, cellulose, corn starch, potato starch, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate; granulating and disintegrating agents, for example, maize starch, alginic acid, alginates or sodium starch glycolate; binding agents, for example starch, gelatin or acacia; lubricating agents, for example silica, magnesium or calcium stearate, stearic acid or talc; effervescing mixtures; dyestuffs, sweeteners, wetting agents such as lecithin, polysorbates or lauryl sulphate. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate may be employed. Such preparations may be manufactured in a known manner, for example by means of mixing, granulating, tableting, sugar coating or film coating processes.
Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is present as such, or mixed with water or an oil medium, for example, peanut oil, liquid paraffin, or olive oil.
Aqueous suspensions contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions. Such excipients are suspending agents, for example, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose,
hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone gum tragacanth and gum acacia; dispersing or wetting agents may be naturally-occurring phosphatides, for example lecithin, or condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids, for example polyoxyethylene stearate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols, for example heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides for example polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.
The said aqueous suspensions may also contain one or more preservatives, for example, ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more colouring agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
Oily suspension may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient in a vegetable oil, for example arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil, or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent, for example beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol.
Sweetening agents, such as those set forth above, and flavouring agents may be added to provide a palatable oral preparation. These compositions may be preserved by this addition of an antioxidant such as ascorbic acid. Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, for example sweetening, flavouring and colouring agents, may also be present.
Pharmaceutical compositions for use in accordance with the invention may also be in the form of oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase may be a vegetable oil, for example olive oil or arachis oils, or a mineral oil, for example liquid paraffin or mixtures of these. Suitable emulsifying agents may be naturally-occurring gums, for example gum acacia or gum tragacanth, naturally occuring phosphatides, for example soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids an hexitol anhydrides, for example sorbitan monooleate, and condensation products of the said partial esters with ethylene oxide, for example polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate. The emulsion may also contain sweetening and flavouring agents. Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, for example glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose. In particular a syrup for diabetic patients can contain as carriers only products, for example sorbitol, which do not metabolise to glucose or which only metabolise a very small amount to glucose. Such formulations may also contain a demulcent, a preservative and flavouring and coloring agents;
B) Parenterally, either subcutaneously, or intravenously, or intramuscularly, or intrasternally, or by infusion techniques, in the form of sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions. This suspension may be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing of wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic paternally-acceptable diluent or solvent, for example as a solution in 1,3 -butane diol.
Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water,
Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectables; C) By inhalation, in the form of aerosols or solutions for nebulizers;
D) Rectally, in the form of suppositories prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non-irritating excipient which is solid at ordinary temperature but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug. Such materials are cocoa butter and poly-ethylene glycols; E) Topically, in the form of creams, ointments, jellies, collyriums, solutions or suspensions.
F) Vaginally, in the form of pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the active ingredient such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate. The present invention is further illustrated in the Examples which follow: EXAMPLES Example 1 Methods
Cells. RAW 264.7 macrophages were obtained from the European Cell Culture Collection (Porton Down, UK). Primary mouse macrophages were isolated from adult (8 week old) mice and cultured at 37°C with 5% C02 in RPMI with 10% foetal calf serum (FCS), 1% penicillin/streptomycin and 1% L-glutamine (Lonza, Basel, Switzerland). Mtb (H37Rv strain) and M. bovis BCG (Pasteur strain) were kindly provided by Simon Clark and Dominic Kelly. Fluorescent M smegmatis (mc2155 strain expressing mCherry) was provided by David Russell. Mycobacteria were grown on 7H11 agar plates (supplemented with Oleic Albumin Dextrose Catalase) before transfer to 7H9 liquid media (supplemented with Albumin Dextrose Catalase). PCl-overexpressing Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells (Millard, E. E., et al. J Biol Chem 275, 38445-38451, doi: 10.1074/jbc.M003180200 M003180200 [pii], 2000) were grown at 37°C with 5% C02 in DMEM-F12 with 10% FCS, 1%) penicillin/streptomycin and 1% glutamine. U18666A was used at a concentration of ^g/ml for 48 hours.
Generation of human monocyte-derived macrophages. Peripheral blood CD14+ monocytes were isolated using microbeads (Miltenyi Biotec) according to manufacturer's instructions, differentiated in the presence of M-CSF (lOng/ml) in X-vivo media (Lonza) and used after 7 days.
FLUOS labelling of mycobacteria. A volume (5ml) of a mid-exponential (OD6oo 0.8 - 1.2) mycobacteria culture was centrifuged, resuspended in 500μ1 of HEPES buffer (pH 9.1) and labelled with 25μ1 of 20mg/ml FLUOS (5(6)-carboxyfluorescein-N- hydroxysuccinimideester) in DMSO. Bacteria were washed twice with warm 7H9 (37°C) and resuspended in 500μ1 of RPMI-FCS. The OD6oo of the solution was measured and the concentration of bacteria determined.
Generation of mCherry-expressing BCG. BCG was electroporated with pVl 16 plasmid containing gene for mCherry using standard parameters. Transformed colonies were selected on 7H11 OADC agar plates. Individual colonies were picked and grown in liquid culture.
Host Cell Infection. Unless otherwise stated infections were carried out at a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 12.5. Host cells were plated out approximately 18h prior to infection. A volume of mid-exponential mycobacteria was centrifuged and resuspended in
appropriate medium prior to dilution.
Purification of mycobacterial cell wall components. Total lipids and mycolic acid methyl-esters (MAMES) were extracted from bovis. A 100ml culture of bacteria was grown to an absorbance of 1.0 at OD6oo, centrifuged and the bacteria were resuspended in 5ml PBS. This was transferred to an 8.5ml screw top glass culture tube and centrifuged prior to removal of supernatant and drying of pellet overnight at room temperature. The desiccated bacterial pellet was incubated with 2ml of 5% aqueous tetrabutylammonium hydroxide at 100°C for 16h. The sample was cooled and ΙΟΟμΙ of methyl iodide, 4ml dichlorom ethane and 2ml H20 added. The sample was mixed for 30min and the lower organic layer removed, washed with 3x5ml H20 and dried under nitrogen. The dried extract was re-suspended in 1ml diethyl ether, mixed for 60min and centrifuged at 3,000 x g for 5min. The supernatant was removed, pellet dried under nitrogen and then
resuspended in 500μ1 of dichloromethane to give the mycolic acid methyl esters (MAMES) and fatty acid methyl esters (FAMES). The sample was applied to a TLC plate and separated in one dimension with petroleum ether: acetone (95:5) solvent system. The TLC plate was sprayed with 5% (v/v) molybdophosphoric acid and charred at 110°C to analyze the lipid species. Purified mycolic acid fraction (from Mtb) and trehalose dimycolate (TDM) (from M.bovis) were purchased from Sigma- Aldrich.
Purification of mycobacterial lipids
Lipid Extraction and Analysis. Crude non-polar lipids and polar lipids were initially extracted from Mtb according to published methods by stirring in petroleum ether and methanolic saline for 2h (Tatituri, R. V. et al. J Biol Chem 282, 4561-4572,
doi: 10.1074/jbc.M608695200, 2007). The biomass was allowed to settle overnight and centrifuged at 3000 rpm for 5 min. The resulting bi-phasic solution was separated and the upper layer containing non-polar lipids recovered. The lower layer was treated with petroleum ether, mixed and harvested as described above. The two upper petroleum ether fractions were combined and dried under reduced pressure. To extract polar lipids, a mixture of CHCh/CftOH/NaCl solution was added to the lower methanolic saline layer and the solution stirred for 4h and left to settle overnight. This mixture was filtered and the filter cake re-extracted twice with CHCh/CftOH/NaCl solution. Appropriate amounts of CHCb and NaCl solution were added to the combined filtrates and the mixture stirred for lh and allowed to settle. The lower layer containing the polar lipids was recovered and dried under reduced pressure. The non-polar and polar lipid extracts were examined by ID thin-layer chromatography on aluminum TLC plates of silica gel 60 F254 (Merck
EMD Millipore, Catalog no. 5554-7). Lipids were visualized by spraying plates either with 5% ethanolic molybdophosphoric acid and charring, a-naphthol/sulfuric acid followed by gentle charring of plates for glycolipids, a Dittmer and Lester reagent which is specific for phospholipids and glycophospholipids or using ninhydrin, a amino specific reagent for detecting amino residues on extracted lipids (Tatituri, R. V. et al. J Biol Chem 282, 4561- 4572, doi: 10.1074/jbc.M608695200, 2007; Dobson, G. et al. in Chemical Methods in Bacterial Systematics (eds M. Goodfellow & D.E. Minnikin) 237-265 (Academic Press, 1985)).
Purification of Lipid Extract. After analysing the lipid profiles by TLC, purifications by diethylaminoethyl (DEAE) cellulose chromatography were performed. The crude polar lipid extract was dissolved in Solution A (CHCI3/CH3OH (2: 1, v/v)) and a few drops of H20 added as necessary to dissolve the lipids. The polar lipid fraction was eluted using Solution A to remove all mycolates, their glycosylated forms and other zwitterionic lipids. Charged lipids were then eluted using ammonium acetate dissolved in Solution A in a stepwise gradient of increasing concentration of ammonium acetate in chloroform/methanol ranging from ImM to 300mM.
Further Purification of Mycolates. The glycolate mycolate fraction was further purified by either using silica gel packed into glass columns or by preparative TLC. In the silica gel procedure, mycolate fraction was dissolved in 100% CHCI3 and initially eluted with CHCI3/CH3OH (80: 1, v/v) and further eluted with decreasing concentration of CHCI3 but keeping the CH3OH constant. The glycomycolate fractions were monitored by TLC on a 10 cm x 10 cm aluminum backed TLC plates of silica gel 60 F254 (Merck
EMD Millipore,) and developing the plate either in CHCI3/CH3OH (80: 10, v/v) or
CHCI3/CH3OH/H2O (65:25:4 v/v/v). The gly corny colates were visualized by spraying with α-naphthol/sulfuric acid followed by gentle charring. In preparative ID TLC, mycolate extract was loaded on a 10cm χ 20cm plastic-backed TLC plates of silica gel 60 F254 (Merck EMD Millipore,) run in TLC solvent system
Figure imgf000071_0001
(50:60:2.5:3 v/v/v/v)/. TLC plates were subsequently sprayed with either ethanolic Rhodamine 6G for detection of non-polar lipids or 1,6-di phenyl- 1,3, 5 -hexatriene for polar lipids. The lipid bands were visualized, marked under UV light and the corresponding purified lipid spots were scraped from the plates, silica extracted and used for biological testing. Lysosomal pH measurements. Lysosomal pH was measured as described (Bach, G., Chen, C. S. & Pagano, R. E. Clin Chim Acta 280, 173-179, 1999) with minor
modification. Fluorescein-dextran and Rhodamine-dextran (Sigma) were loaded at 0.25mg/ml for 12h into cells at 37°C followed by 12h chase at 37°C to label lysosomes. Image analysis and quantification of fluorescence was performed using SimplePCI software.
Direct Calcium quantification. For documenting Ca2+ concentration low affinity Rhod- dextran in conjunction with the Ca2+ insensitive Alexa-Fluor 488 dextran (Molecular Probe s/Invitrogen, Paisley, UK) were used at concentrations of 0.25mg/ml and O. lmg/ml respectively. Intracellular Ca2+ was measured using the membrane permeable Ca2+ indicators Fura 2- AM alone or Calcium Green 1-AM in conjunction with Fura Red- AM (all at 5 EM, Molecular Probes). Cells were loaded as described (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] 10.1038/ nm.1876, 2008) for lh at room
temperature prior to washing and visualization of Ca2+ release on a Zeiss LSM 510 confocal (for adherent cells) or cuvette based recording on a Jasco FP-777 (with Ca2+ recording module CA-261) for non-adherent cells. Movies were analysed using Magipix and Magigraph software.
Indirect calcium quantification. Cells were loaded with 2 μΜ Fura 2-AM (Teflabs) in the presence of 0.03% Pluronic F127 (Invitrogen) in a buffer containing (mM: 121 NaCl, 5.4 KCl, 0.8 MgC12, 1.8 CaC12, 6 NaHC03, 25 HEPES, 10 Glucose) for 45 min at room temperature, followed by a 15 min de-esterification. Cells were washed once with Ca2+- free buffer supplemented with 1 mM EGTA and twice with Ca2+-free buffer containing 100 mM EGTA and subsequent experiments conducted in this same buffer. Cells were mounted on the stage of an Olympus 1X71 microscope equipped with a 40 UApo/340 objective (1.35 NA) and a 12-bit Photometries Coolsnap HQ2 CCD camera. Cells were excited alternately by 350-and 380-nm light using a Cairn monochromator; emission data were collected at 480-540 nm using a bandpass filter. Experiments were conducted at room temperature with an image collected every 2-3 s. Lysosomal Ca2+ content was assessed upon addition of 200 mM GPN (Santa Cruz Biotechnology) which lyses Cathepsin- containing acidic intracellular Ca2+ stores. At the end of each run, auto fluorescence was determined by addition of ΙμΜ ionomycin (Calbiochem) with 4 mM MnCl2, which quenches fura-2. Images were analysed using custom-written Magipix software (R. Jacob, Kings College London, London, UK) on a single-cell basis, the auto fluorescence signal was subtracted and the data expressed as the maximal peak fluorescence changes
(D350/380).
Cathepsin C activity. The lysosomes of RAW 264.7 macrophages (that had been infected with BCG mCherry for 24 hours and those of control cells) were labelled with
LysoTracker Green D D-26 (100 nM for 5 min at room temperature) in a buffer containing (mM): 121 NaCl, 5.4 KC1, 0.8 MgCl2, 1.8 CaCl2, 6 NaHCOs, 25 HEPES, 10 Glucose). The cells were washed once in the same buffer but without Ca2+ (Ca2+-free buffer) and supplemented with 1 mM EGTA. The cells were then washed twice with Ca2+- free buffer containing 100 μΜ EGTA and subsequent experiments conducted in this buffer. The cells were mounted on the stage of a Zeiss LSM510 Meta confocal laser- scanning microscope equipped with a 40x objective; excitation/emission (nm): green (488/505-530), red (543/>560). Experiments were conducted at room temperature with an image collected every 1 s. The activity of Cathepsin C was inferred from the release of LysoTracker (i.e. a decrease in fluorescence) from lysosomes upon the addition of the lysosome-disrupting cathepsin C substrate, Glycyl-L-phenylalanine 2-naphthylamide (GPN, 200 μΜ). Images were analysed using custom-written Magipix software (R. Jacob, King's College London, London, UK) -on a single-cell basis. Data are presented as the mean ± S.E.M. of the initial rate (units of LysoTracker fluorescence per second normalised to the basal fluorescence) or by the rate constant calculated from an exponential curve fit.
Sphingosine HPLC measurement. Performed as described (He, X. Et al. Anal Biochem 340, 113-122 (2005). GSL HPLC measurement. Performed as described (Neville, D. C. et al. Anal Biochem 331, 275-282, 2004).
Cholesterol measurement. Cholesterol and cholesterol esters were quantified using the Amplex Red Molecular Probes kit, according to manufacturers instructions. Cellular cholesterol was visualised using filipin (Polysciences, Warrington PA, USA) (Lloyd- Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii]10.1038/ nm.1876, 2008).
Sphingomyelin measurement. Intracellular sphingomyelin was visualised using Lysenin (Peptides International, Inc., Louisville KY, USA) as described (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] l 0.1038/ nm.1876, 2008).
Cholera toxin B subunit (CtxB) transport assays. Cells were incubated with 0.5mg/ml Alexa Fluor CtxB for 30min at room temperature followed by two washes in complete medium and further incubation for 2h at 37°C in complete medium. Cells were then washed twice in PBS and fixed for 15min at room temperature with 3.7%
paraformaldehyde.
Lysotracker staining. Cells were live stained with 50nM Lysotracker green (Molecular Probes) in PBS at room temperature for 30 min prior to washing.
BODIPY-LacCer transport. Performed as described (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14,
1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] 10.1038/ nm.1876, 2008) with minor modifications.
BODIPY-LacCer was used at a concentration of 5μΜ.
Clearance of M. smegmatis Host cells on coverslips were infected with M smegmatis (MOI 12.5) and incubated at 37°C/5% C02 for 2h. Cells were washed, and incubated at 37°C/5% C02 with fresh medium. At stated time points coverslips were washed, PFA fixed, and M. smegmatis clearance quantified via microscopy.
Treatments and analysis of infected cells. Cells were infected with BCG 48h prior to washing and addition of therapeutics. Concentrations and duration of treatment were as indicated. Cells were paraformaldehyde fixed (4% PFA 15 minutes room temperature), and levels of fluorescence quantified using fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS). Samples were acquired on a three laser BD FACS CantoTM II flow cytometer using BD FACSDivaTM software version 6.1 collecting a minimum of 10 000 events.
Electron Microscopy. Pelleted human macrophages in 1.5 ml PBS were slowly mixed with 25% glutaraldehyde (GA) to achieve a final concentration of 0.1%. The pellet was fixed for 30min on ice. Pellets washed twice with cacodylate buffer on ice and the pellet fixed in a solution of 2%PFA, 2.5% GA in 0.1M cacodylate buffer on ice for 15min, and at RT for 2h. Pellets were then washed 3 x with 0.1M cacodylate, treated with a solution of 0.1M glycine for 45min before post fixation in 1% osmium tetroxide for 2h, followed by cacodylate and maleate buffer washes, further post fixation and staining with 1% uranyl acetate in maleate buffer for lh in the dark. They were then washed with maleate buffer and dehydrated through an ascending series of ice-cold ethanol up to 100% ethanol, followed by three changes of dry ethanol at room temperature, three changes of propylene oxide, and infiltration with a 1 : 1 araldite: propylene oxide for 1.5h. Propylene oxide was blown off, pellets embedded in resin and maintained at 60°C for 3 days prior to sectioning. For Kupffer cell analysis, Npc1'1' mice were PBS perfused, followed by perfusion with a mixture containing 4% PFA, 15% picric acid, and 0.5% GA in 0.1M cacodylate buffer for 20min. Liver was removed, sectioned, and fixed a solution of 2%PFA, 2.5% GA, 2mM calcium chloride and 0.1% picric acid in 0.1M cacodylate buffer on ice for 2h, prior to incubation overnight. Samples were then fixed at room temperature for 6h, returned to 4°C overnight, washed with cacodylate buffer and transferred to antifreeze and allowed to sink overnight. Samples were cut into l-2mm cubes in 0.1M cacodylate buffer with 2mM calcium chloride, washed thrice, and post-fixed for 90min in 1% osmium tetroxide buffer. From this point protocol was as described above.
Quantification of NPCl/2 Protein levels. Proteins were separated on SDS-PAGE and transferred to nitrocellulose membrane (Immobilon P). Membranes were blocked overnight at 4°C in Tris Buffered Saline (TBS) containing 0.1% Tween-20 and 5% powdered milk, before probing with anti- PCl Antibody (Pierce) overnight at 4°C washed and then probed with Horseradish Peroxidase conjugated anti-rabbit secondary antibody (Pierce). Blots were developed with chemiluminescent substrate (Pierce) and images collected on CCD imager (Biorad). Membranes were stripped and re-probed with anti- -actin antibody to confirm equal protein loading into each lane. Statistical Analysis. All statistical analyses performed with Graphpad Prism. Results
Infection with pathogenic mycobacteria induce NPC phenotypes in murine and human macrophages.
NPC cells display a unique combination of cellular phenotypes that include storage of sphingomyelin, GSLs and sphingosine, mistrafficking of GSLs from the Golgi recycling- pathway to LE/Lys (Chen, C. S., Patterson, M. C, Wheatley, C. L., O'Brien, J. F. & Pagano, R. E. Broad screening test for sphingolipid-storage diseases. Lancet 354, 901-905; 1999) and reduced luminal LE/Lys Ca2+ storage and impaired LE/Lys Ca2+ release (Lloyd- Evans, E. & Piatt, F. M. Traffic 11, 419-428, doi:TRA1032 [pii]
10.1111/j . l600-0854.2010.01032.x (2010); Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] 10.1038/nm. l 876 (2008)).
The inventors investigated whether comparable phenotypes occur in cells infected with pathogenic mycobacteria. The murine macrophage cell line RAW 264.7 was infected with live BCG (Pasteur strain), an attenuated form oi Mycobacterium bovis, which is a widely studied model of early stage Mtb infection. In agreement with known NPC cellular phenotypes (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876
[pii] 10.1038/nm. l876; 2008), BCG infected macrophages exhibited elevated sphingosine levels relative to uninfected cells 48 hours post-infection (Fig. lA,p<0.05). Infected macrophages also exhibited reduced LE/Lys Ca2+, as assessed indirectly by discharging their Ca2+ content with the lysomotropic agent glycyl-L-phenylalanine- -napthylamide (GPN) (an agent that induces osmotic lysis upon hydrolysis by Cathepsin C) (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] 10.1038/nm. l876; 2008); a 24-hour infection with BCG was associated with a reduction in GPN-induced Ca2+ release, whereas infection with non-pathogenic Mycobacterium smegmatis (M. smegmatis) was not (Fig IB, p< 0.001). Direct measurement of endo-lysosomal Ca2+ content with a luminal Ca2+-dye (low-affinity Rhod-dextran) confirmed reduced levels of lysosomal Ca2+ in BCG-infected RAW cells (Fig 1C, p<0.001). Neither cathepsin C activity nor lysosomal pH was affected by BCG infection. Another NPC phenotype is elevated GSLs. Total GSL levels were significantly elevated by 48 hours (Fig. ID, p<0.05). Accumulation of lactosylceramide (LacCer), which occurs in NPC cells and in tissues of Npcl'1' mice was not detected at 24 and 48 hours post-infection (BCG-infected RAW 264.7 cells) but was significantly elevated 7 days post-infection (Fig. 2A p<0.01). The most widely recognised cellular hallmark of NPC cells is the storage of cholesterol within LE/Lys (Vanier, M. T. Niemann- Pick disease type C. Orphanet J Rare Dis 5, 16, doi: l 0.1186/1750- 1172-5- 16 (2010);
Vanier, M. T. Lipid changes in Niemann-Pick disease type C brain: personal experience and review of the literature. Neurochem Res 24, 481-489; 1999). When assayed using the fluorescent cholesterol-binding antibiotic, filipin, cholesterol accumulation in punctate structures was observed in BCG infected RAW 264.7 cells, but not in cells infected with non-pathogenic M. smegmatis (Fig. 2B). Biochemical quantitation of cholesterol confirmed higher levels in BCG-infected cells (Fig. 2C, p<0.05). Interestingly, storage of cholesterol was not restricted to cells infected with BCG; neighbouring, uninfected cells also displayed elevated cholesterol storage (Fig 2B) suggesting local paracrine factors released from infected cells. Other cellular hallmarks of NPC were also induced by BCG infection but not byM smegmatis. This was demonstrated using fluorescently conjugated cholera toxin subunit B and lysenin that measure the storage and mislocalisation (altered trafficking) of GM1 ganglioside (Fig. 3Ai) and sphingomyelin respectively (Fig. 3AHii).
To determine the relevance of the inventors' findings with BCG to the human pathogen Mtb, the same cell line was infected with live Mtb (H37rv strain). After 48 hours post- infection total cellular GSL levels were measured and confirmed statistically significant elevation of GSLs in ¾-infected cells (Fig. 3Bi, p<0.05); representative HPLC traces are shown (Fig.3Bii).
To determine whether the findings in a murine macrophage cell line would be replicated in primary human macrophages, which are more relevant for Mtb infection/TB, monocyte- derived macrophages from healthy donors were infected with BCG. Increased levels of sphingosine (Fig. 3C), reduced LE/Lys Ca2+ levels indirectly assayed by GPN-evoked Ca2+ release (Fig. 3D) and elevated GSLs (Fig. 4A) were observed. Similarly, cholesterol storage in LE/Lys was also detected in BCG-infected human macrophages (and in non- infected neighbouring cells) (Fig. 4Bi), accompanied by mistrafficking of GM1 ganglioside (Fig. 4Bii). Significant expansion of the lysosomal compartment (a phenotype of lysosomal storage disease cells due to increased lysosomal volume and increased lysosomal biogenesis, visualised with Lysotracker (Lachmann, R. H. et al. Treatment with miglustat reverses the lipid-trafficking defect in Niemann-Pick disease type C. Neurobiol Dis 16, 654-658 (2004); te Vruchte, D. et al. Relative acidic compartment volume as a lysosomal storage disorder-associated biomarker. J Clin Invest 124, 1320-1328, doi: 10.1172/JCI72835; 2014) was also detected, another hallmark of NPC (Fig. 4Biii). None of these changes occurred when human macrophages were infected with non- pathogenic M. smegmatis (Fig 4Bi-iii). Analysis by electron microscopy revealed that whilst control macrophages exhibited normal cellular architecture, BCG-infected cells showed both the presence of intracellular mycobacteria and electron-dense lamellar storage bodies. These were similar to those observed in uninfected Kupffer cells in the liver from the Npcr ~ mouse and in cells with pharmacologically-induced NPC phenotypes (via U18666A treatment). In contrast, cells infected with M smegmatis exhibited no evidence of storage bodies. Together, these data indicate that pathogenic mycobacteria induce cellular phenotypes indistinguishable from the lysosomal storage disease, NPC.
Mycobacterial cell wall lipids induce NPC phenotypes in the absence of live mycobacteria
Unexpectedly, cholesterol accumulation was observed in non-infected as well as infected cells (Figs 2B and 4Bi). The inventors therefore hypothesised that there is a factor(s) derived from BCG and Mtb that inhibits the NPC pathway and that this is released/secreted and endocytosed by non-infected neighbouring cells. The inventors prepared chloroform: methanol-extracted BCG lipids and found that this fraction induced accumulation/re- distribution of cholesterol (Fig 5Ai), mistrafficking of GM1 ganglioside (Fig 5Aii) and accumulation/re-distribution of sphingomyelin (Fig 5Aiii) in uninfected RAW 264.7 macrophages, comparable to the NPC phenotypes induced by live mycobacteria. The heat- treated preparation had the same ability to affect GM1 ganglioside distribution as the non- heat-treated fraction, suggesting that the NPC phenotype-inducing agent was a lipid and not proteinaceous (Fig. 5B). ¾-derived mycolic acids (the major cell wall-derived class of lipids in Mtb) also induced NPC phenotypes, including storage of cholesterol and sphingomyelin in RAW 246.7 macrophages, (Fig. 5Ci and ii) and cholesterol storage and GM1 mistrafficking in primary human macrophages (Fig. 6Ai and ii).
To narrow down the nature of the causative lipid(s), individual purified mycolic acid ester species derived from Mtb that included trehalose dimycolate (TDM), trehalose
monomycolate (TMM) and glucose monomycolate (GMM) were assayed. It was observed that TDM gave the greatest increase in Lysotracker fluorescence, indicative of NPC-like lysosomal expansion/storage (Fig. 6B, p<0.05). The other lipids were less effective: GMM and TMM lipids from Mtb caused only modest lysosomal expansion that did not reach statistical significance, whilst GMM from non-pathogenic M smegmatis had minimal effects (Fig. 6B). In addition to affecting lysosomal morphology, TDM from bovis also recapitulated PC phenotypes in terms of reduced LE/Lys Ca2+ levels (Fig 7i and ii respectively), cholesterol storage and GM1 mi straffi eking (Fig. 8i and ii respectively) and GSL accumulation (Fig. 9). Taken together, t e Mtb lipid TDM reproduces the NPC phenotype caused by pathogenic mycobacteria. Mycobacteria target the NPCl protein
If TDM inhibited the NPC pathway via interaction with the NPCl protein then the inventors reasoned that NPCl mice lacking one NPCl allele (heterozygous NPCl cells) would be more susceptible to inhibition than wild-type cells. Bone marrow-derived macrophages generated from NPCl heterozygous mice {Npcl+I~) were therefore incubated with TDM. It was observed that cells with 50% of wild-type NPCl protein levels were indeed more susceptible to inhibition (Fig 10A). These data were complemented by the demonstration that CHO cells overexpressing NPCl were more resistant to induction of NPC cellular phenotypes than wild-type cells when exposed to TDM. The extent of NPCl overexpression was proportional to the resistance to phenotype induction; cells over- expressing NPCl by 15-fold were more resistant than those over-expressing NPCl 5-fold (Fig. 10B). To investigate whether the mycobacterial lipids potentially interact with NPCl or NPC2 proteins, the proteins' expression levels in RAW264.7 cells infected with BCG were examined. Whereas expression of NPCl protein was up regulated in infected cells, there were no changes in NPC2 levels (Fig. 11).
One prediction that can be made from these findings is that NPC patient cells that lack functional NPCl due to a genetic defect will not be able to clear even non-pathogenic mycobacteria as they have impaired LE/Lys fusion. Non-pathogenic mycobacterial species normally cannot inhibit phagosome-lysosome fusion (they may lack inhibitory lipids) and are readily cleared by healthy cells. Consistent with this hypothesis, RAW 246.7 cells in which an NPC phenotype was pharmacologically induced by incubation with U18666A, prior to infection, had impaired ability to clear non-pathogenic M. smegmatis (Fig. 12) relative to untreated cells. Impaired clearance ofM smegmatis was also observed in Npcl' " bone marrow-derived mouse macrophages, U18666A-treated wild-type mouse macrophages (Fig. 13) and primary human macrophages treated with U18666A (Fig. 14). This has important implications for NPC disease patients as they may have altered microbial handling and an altered microbiome.
NPC therapeutics promote clearance of pathogenic mycobacteria via a Ca2+- dependent mechanism.
Transport and fusion events in the late endocytic system are critically dependent upon Ca2+ release from LE/Lys (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876
[pii] 10.1038/nm. l876; 2008). This release is impaired in NPC, thereby preventing organelle fusion (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876
[pii] 10.1038/nm. l876; 2008). Nonetheless, elevation of cytosolic Ca2+ by
pharmacologically manipulating other Ca2+ stores (such as the ER) can compensate for the defect in LE/Lys Ca2+ release and correct the NPC phenotypes (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii]10.1038/nm. l876; 2008). Curcumin inhibits Ca2+ uptake by the sarco-endoplasmic reticulum Ca2+-ATPase (SERCA) (Bilmen, J. G., et al. Eur J Biochem 268, 6318-6327, doi:2589 [pii]; 2001) and thereby causes Ca2+ leak from the ER. The subsequent elevated of cytosolic [Ca2+] overcomes the block in LE/Lys fusion and rescues NPC phenotypes (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] 10.1038/nm. l876; 2008). It was therefore tested whether curcumin promotes clearance of pathogenic mycobacteria. RAW264.7 cells were infected with mCherry-expressing BCG for 48 hours, then treated with or without 30 μΜ high-purity curcumin for a further 24 hours. A FACS assay was used to determine the frequency and extent of mycobacterial infection by quantifying the fluorescence of mCherry-expressing M. bovis BCG (Fig. 15). The average fluorescence intensity indicated a significantly lower level of infection (i.e. enhanced clearance) in cells incubated with curcumin relative to untreated cells (Fig. 16, p<0.05). The capacity of two other compounds that have shown efficacy in NPC cells was tested; miglustat, an imino sugar inhibitor of GSL biosynthesis (EMA approved for NPC therapy (Patterson, M. C. et al. Rev Neurol (separata) 43, 8, 2006; Pineda, M. et al. Mol
Genet Metab 98, 243-249, doi: 10.1016/j.ymgme.2009.07.003, 2009) and β-cyclodextrin, a cyclic oligosaccharide that has shown efficacy in animal models of NPC (Davidson, C. D. et al. PLoS One 4, e6951, doi: 10.1371/journal.pone.0006951; 2009; Ramirez, C. M. et al. Pediatr Res 68, 309-315, doi: 10.1203/PDR.0b013e3181ee4dd2; 2010; Camargo, F. et al. Life Sci 70, 131-142, 2001; Stein, V. M. et al. J Neuropathol Exp Neurol 71, 434-448, doi: 10.1097/NEN.0b013e31825414a6, 2012). Although neither of these molecules alone promoted mycobacterial clearance over this time course (Fig. 16), miglustat in
combination with curcumin showed synergy. No such synergy was seen when curcumin and cyclodextrin were used in combination. Curcumin also significantly reduced mycobacterial burden in infected primary human macrophages (Fig. 17, p<0.05).
Several pieces of evidence suggest that the enhancement of BCG clearance by curcumin was dependent upon its ER Ca2+-mobilising properties, assessed by probing ER/neutral Ca2+ store Ca2+ content with ionomycin. Whilst high-purity curcumin (SERCA antagonist) promoted BCG clearance, the inactive curcumin analogue FLLL31 (not a SERCA antagonist) had no effect (Fig. 18). Furthermore, bacterial clearance by curcumin, was abrogated by loading cells with the Ca2+ chelator, BAPTA, to suppress a Ca2+ increase (Fig. 19). Although curcuminoids have previously been reported to have direct anti-Mtb activity in host-cell free systems, the slow kinetics of such an anti-bacterial action cannot account for the relatively rapid effects that the inventors observed: it took >4 days for high- purity curcumin to reduce BCG growth in broth. In view of the differences in time scale, it seems likely that the enhanced clearance observed here (Figs. 16-19) results from curcumin modulating intracellular Ca2+. Discussion
Through these investigations into the pathogenesis of NPC it was unexpectedly found that Mtb inhibits the NPC pathway, promoting its intra-cellular survival in host macrophages. This link between this rare lysosomal storage disorder and Mtb infection has several important implications for understanding host-pathogen interactions and for developing new therapies to combat TB, particularly in the current era of antibiotic resistance.
Phagocytosed Mtb bacilli undergo a period of rapid multiplication, concomitant with granuloma development (Russell, D. G., et al. Nat Immunol 10, 943-948,
doi: 10.1038/ni. l781; 2009). A significant element of the mycobacterial intracellular survival strategy is its ability to inhibit phagosome-lysosome fusion, thereby avoiding lysosomal destruction. Here, evidence is provided supporting a model in which pathogenic mycobacteria, such as Mtb and BCG, secrete lipids that inhibit the NPC pathway, phenocopying NPCl7" cells. The NPC phenotypes induced in host cells include elevated levels of sphingosine, which in turn inhibits LE/Lys Ca2 store filling (Lloyd-Evans, E. et al. Nat Med 14, 1247-1255, doi:nm. l876 [pii] 10.1038/nm. l876; 2008), leading to reduce phagosome-lysosome fusion facilitating intracellular mycobacterial survival.
Pharmacological compensation for this Ca2+ homeostatic defect by decreasing Ca2+ buffering by the ER, presumably in the vicinity of lysosomes, enhanced clearance of pathogenic mycobacteria, offering a new approach to potentially treat latent Mtb infection. These findings also contribute to the debate on the involvement of Ca2+ in phagosome- lysosome fusion and support published studies suggesting it is a Ca2+ dependent process (Majeed, M, et al. Microbial pathogenesis 24, 309-320, doi: 10.1006/mpat.1997.0200, 1998). Interestingly, the inventors observed that induction of PC phenotypes was not restricted to macrophages that harbour internalised mycobacteria, but was also observed in uninfected bystander cells. Cell wall-derived lipids from pathogenic mycobacteria are actively trafficked out of the phagosome and distributed within the infected cell, as well as within extracellular vesicles that can be endocytosed by bystander macrophages (Beatty, W. L. et al. Traffic 1, 235-247, 2000). The inventors found that exposure to a lipid fraction from BCG and mycolic acids derived ixomMtb both induced NPC cellular phenotypes, replicating the effect of the intact mycobacterium. Of the structurally distinct lipid classes tested the TDM fraction gave the largest increase in lysosomal expansion. The
immunomodulatory properties of TDM (also known as cord factor) have been previously documented, with it initiating pro-inflammatory responses (Bowdish, D. M. et al. PLoS Pathog 5, el000474, doi: 10.1371/journal.ppat.1000474, 2009) and most significantly can induce granuloma formation in mice in the absence of the intact mycobacterium (Kim, M. J. et al. EMBO molecular medicine 2, 258-274, doi: 10.1002/emmm.201000079, 2010). This lipid species therefore has the capability to induce multiple responses in the infected host cell, many of which are likely to be beneficial for its survival. The importance of TDM is further reinforced by the fact that mycobacteria possessing lower levels of this lipid (either due to mutation or chemical removal) have reduced virulence and an impaired capacity to modulate endocytic trafficking and phagosome maturation (Katti, M. K. et al. Cellular microbiology 10, 1286-1303, doi: 10.1111/j. l462-5822.2008.01126.x, 2008;
Indrigo, J., et al. Microbiology 149, 2049-2059, 2003).
The simplest hypothesis to explain the inventors' findings is that TDM lipids directly bind to NPC1 and inhibit its function, although an indirect mechanism dependent on NPC1 cannot be ruled out. There is currently no structure for intact NPC1 and no direct functional assay for NPCl, making this a technically difficult hypothesis to test. NPCl is a mammalian orthologue of an ancient family of bacterial transporters termed Root
Nodulation Division (RND) permeases (Davies, J. P., Science 290, 2295-2298,
doi: 10.1126/science.290.5500.2295 290/5500/2295 [pii], 2000). Interestingly, members of this family of proteins (termed MmpL) act as mycolic acid transporters, facilitating lipid secretion by mycobacteria (including Mtb) (Varela, C. et al. Chemistry & biology 19, 498- 506, doi: 10.1016/j.chembiol.2012.03.006, 2012). Indeed, SQ 109 a drug that targets this transporter is currently in clinical trials for treating tuberculosis (Tahlan, K. et al.
Antimicrob Agents Chemother 56, 1797-1809, doi: 10.1128/AAC.05708-l l, 2012). This implies that members of this conserved family of RND proteins have the ability to bind mycolic acids, particularly TMM (Varela, C. et al. Chemistry & biology 19, 498-506, doi: 10.1016/j.chembiol.2012.03.006, 2012) and indeed Mmpl3 is essential for viability of Mtb (Domenech, P., et al., Infection and immunity 73, 3492-3501,
doi: 10.1128/IAI.73.6.3492-3501.2005, 2005). It may therefore be the case that the mammalian NPCl protein also binds mycolic acids, but with the lipid acting as an inhibitor not a substrate. Taken together, these studies demonstrate a remarkable role for mycobacterial RND permease family members. They are essential virulence factors for pathogen survival where they serve as mycolic acid transporters, but their mammalian counterpart NPCl is also be targeted by the pathogen once within the host cell. The complex biology of the RND permease family of proteins remains incompletely
understood and merits further investigation.
In this study, the inventors provide several lines of evidence supporting NPCl as the potential target for inhibitory lipids shed by pathogenic mycobacteria. The susceptibility of cells to the induction of NPC phenotypes was dependent upon the relative levels of the NPCl protein; Npcl+I~ macrophages were more sensitive than wild type whilst
overexpression conferred resistance. NPCl, but not NPC2, was significantly up regulated in BCG infected macrophages; significantly the NPCl protein is also up regulated in Mtb granulomas in vivo (Kim, M. J. et al. EMBO molecular medicine 2, 258-274, doi: 10.1002 /emmm.201000079, 2010), perhaps reflecting an attempt to compensate for reduced function. This upregulation may act to slow the rate of induction of NPC disease cellular phenotypes by the mycobacterium as the inventors saw in the over NPCl overexpressing cells. However, the enhanced copy number of NPCl protein will still be subject to inhibition by mycobacterial lipids, so cannot prevent the development of stable infection over time. Finally, pharmacological or genetic blockade of NPC 1 significantly enhanced the survival of non-pathogenic mycobacterial species. This may have significant implications for NPC patients as it would suggest that they are likely to have altered microbial handling, and as a result harbour an unusual microbiome, and potentially have greater susceptibly to Mtb infection.
The inventors reasoned that should inhibition of the NPC pathway be central to the intracellular survival of pathogenic mycobacteria, pharmacological agents that correct NPC cells should promote clearance of the mycobacterium. Consistent with this hypothesis, a significantly lower bacterial load was measured in cells treated with curcumin, a natural product that raises cytosolic [Ca2+], but not in those exposed to the curcumin analogue (FLLL31) that has no effect on cytosolic Ca2+ levels. The inventors investigated whether two other drugs that have shown efficacy in NPC might also promote elimination of mycobacteria. However, enhanced microbial clearance was not detected when either β-cyclodextrin (which can ameliorate disease symptoms in animal models (Davidson, C. D. et al. PLoS One 4, e6951, doi: 10.1371/journal.pone.0006951, 2009) possibly via stimulation of exocytosis (Chen, F. W., et al., PLoS One 5, doi:el5054 10.1371/journal. pone.0015054, 2010)) or miglustat (a GSL biosynthesis inhibitor (Piatt, F. M., et al, J Biol Chem 269, 8362-8365, 1994) clinically approved for NPC (Patterson, M. C, et al., Lancet neurology 6, 765-772, 2007; Wraith, J. E. et al., Mol Genet Metab 99, 351-357, doi: 10.1016/j.ymgme.2009.12.006, 2010)) were tested. Interestingly, miglustat showed synergy when combined with curcumin. The lack of effect with cyclodextrin would support the proposed exocytotic mechanism of action in NPC (Chen, F. W., et al, PLoS One 5, doi:el5054 10.1371/journal.pone.0015054, 2010), which would not affect the phagosome.
In summary, the inventors have demonstrated for the first time a mechanistic relationship between a rare, inherited fatal neurodegenerative lysosomal disorder and the process used by the most successful human intracellular pathogen to subvert cellular defences. These findings provide not only an explanation for the defective phagosomal maturation observed following Mtb infection, but also provide a unified mechanistic framework accounting for other unexplained phenotypes in Mtb infected macrophages, including cholesterol (Peyron, P. et al. PLoS Pathog 4, el000204, doi: 10.1371/journal.ppat.1000204, 2008) and LacCer storage (Kim, M. J. et al. EMBO molecular medicine 2, 258-274, doi: 10.1002/ emmm.201000079, 2010), calcium homeostatic defects (Majeed, M., et al. Microbial pathogenesis 24, 309-320, doi: 10.1006/mpat.1997.0200, 1998), elevated NPCl expression (Kim, M. J. et al. EMBO molecular medicine 2, 258-274, doi: 10.1002/ emmm.201000079, 2010) and bystander effects on neighbouring cells (Beatty, W. L. et al. Traffic 1, 235-247 (2000). These findings also suggest that correcting or compensating for reduced NPCl function will offer a novel therapeutic approach for treating tuberculosis that targets the host cell and should not be subject to development of resistance.
Although inhibitors of sphingolipid biosynthesis and β-cyclodextrin were found to be inactive, in that neither class of agent promoted mycobacterial clearance when used alone over the time course used, it was unexpectedly found that inhibitors of sphingolipid biosynthesis show synergy when combined with compounds that elevate cytosolic calcium. Indeed, the combination of curcumin, a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium, and miglustat, an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, showed significantly greater efficacy than the calcium modulator on its own and, of course, than the inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis on its own which showed no activity. The invention therefore provides a surprisingly efficacious combination therapy for treating infections by pathogenic mycobacteria, and in particular infections by Mtb, which employs a compound that elevates cytosolic calcium in combination with an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis.
Example 2 - Tablet composition
Tablets, each weighing 0.15 g and containing 12.5 mg of a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and 12.5 mg of an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in accordance with the invention, are manufactured as follows:
Composition for 10,000 tablets
Active compounds (250 g)
Lactose (800 g)
Corn starch (415g)
Talc powder (30 g)
Magnesium stearate (5 g)
The active compounds (a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis), lactose and half of the corn starch are mixed. The mixture is then forced through a sieve 0.5 mm mesh size. Corn starch (10 g) is suspended in warm water (90 ml). The resulting paste is used to granulate the powder. The granulate is dried and broken up into small fragments on a sieve of 1.4 mm mesh size. The remaining quantity of starch, talc and magnesium is added, carefully mixed and processed into tablets.
Example 3 - Injectable Formulation
Formulation A
Active compound 1 100 mg
Active compound 2 100 mg
Hydrochloric Acid Solution 0.1M or
Sodium Hydroxide Solution 0.1M q.s. to pH 4.0 to 7.0
Sterile water q.s. to 10 ml
The two active compounds: a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in accordance with the invention, are dissolved in most of the water (35° 40° C) and the pH adjusted to between 4.0 and 7.0 with the hydrochloric acid or the sodium hydroxide as appropriate. The batch is then made up to volume with water and filtered through a sterile micropore filter into a sterile 10 ml amber glass vial (type 1) and sealed with sterile closures and overseals.
Formulation B
Active Compound 1 62.5 mg
Active Compound 2 62.5 mg
Sterile, Pyrogen-free, pH 7 Phosphate
Buffer, q.s. to 25 ml
Active compound 200 mg
Benzyl Alcohol 0.10 g
Glycofurol 75 1.45 g
Water for injection q.s to 3.00 ml The two active compounds: a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in accordance with the invention, are dissolved in the glycofurol. The benzyl alcohol is then added and dissolved, and water added to 3 ml. The mixture is then filtered through a sterile micropore filter and sealed in sterile 3 ml glass vials (type 1).
Example 4 - Syrup Formulation
Active compound 1 : 125 mg
Active compound 2: 125 mg
Sorbitol Solution 1.50 g
Glycerol 2.00 g
Sodium benzoate 0.005 g
Flavour 0.0125 ml
Purified Water q.s. to 5.00 ml
The two active compounds: a compound which elevates cytosolic calcium and an inhibitor of sphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in accordance with the invention, are dissolved in a mixture of the glycerol and most of the purified water. An aqueous solution of the sodium benzoate is then added to the solution, followed by addition of the sorbitol solution and finally the flavour. The volume is made up with purified water and mixed well.

Claims

1. A combination comprising a SERCA antagonist and an inhibitor of
glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, which combination is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
2. A combination according to claim 1 wherein the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium bovis, Mycobacterium africanum, Mycobacterium cannetti or Mycobacterium microtti.
3. A combination according to claim 1 or claim 2 wherein the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
4. A combination according to any one of claims 1 to 3 which is for use in the treatment of tuberculosis (TB).
5. A combination according to any one of the preceding claims wherein the SERCA antagonist is selected from: curcumin, thapsigargin, nortrilobolide and cyclopiazonic acid, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is selected from an iminosugar, D,L-threo-l-phenyl-2-decanoylamino-3- morpholino- 1 -propanol (PDMP); D,L-threo- 1 -phenyl-2-hexadecanoylamino-3 - morpholino- 1 -propanol (PPMP); D-threo- 1 -phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3 -pyrrolidino- 1 - propanol (P4); 4'-hydroxy-D-threo-l-phenyl-2-palmitoilamino-3-pyrrolidino-l -propanol (4'-hydroxy-P4); 3',4'-ethylenedioxy-P4 (EtDO-P4); N-[(lR,2R)-l-(2,3-Dihydro-l,4- benzodioxin-6-yl)-l-hydroxy-3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat); and 2,5-dihydroxymethyl-3,4-dihydroxypyrrolidine (L-DMDP), and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
6. A combination according to any one of the preceding claims wherein the SERCA antagonist is selected from curcumin, thapsigargin and cyclopiazonic acid, and
pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid
biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
7. A combination according to any one of the preceding claims wherein the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is an iminosugar or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an iminosugar.
8. A combination according to any one of claims 5 to 7 wherein the iminosugar is N- butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ), N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of NB-DNJ or NB-DGJ.
9. A combination according to any one of the preceding claims wherein the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
10. A combination according to any one of claims 1 to 8 wherein the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxygalactonojirimycin (NB-DGJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
1 1. A combination according to any one of claims 1 to 5 wherein the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-[(lR,2R)-l-(2,3-Dihydro-l,4-benzodioxin-6-yl)-l- hydroxy-3-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-2-propanyl]octanamide (eliglustat) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eliglustat.
12. A combination according to claim 1 1 wherein the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is eliglustat tartrate.
13. A combination according to any one of claims 1 to 8 which is for use in the treatment of tuberculosis (TB), wherein the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid
biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin (NB-DNJ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
14. A combination according to any one of the preceding claims which comprises a pharmaceutical composition comprising the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
15. A combination according to any one of claims 1 to 13 comprising a first pharmaceutical composition comprising the SERCA antagonist and a second
pharmaceutical composition comprising the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, wherein the first and second pharmaceutical compositions are for separate, simultaneous, concomitant or sequential administration in the treatment of said infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
16. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a SERCA antagonist, an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, which composition is for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
17. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 16, for use in the treatment of tuberculosis, which composition comprises: curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, N-butyldeoxynojirimycin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
18. A SERCA antagonist, for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
19. A SERCA antagonist according to claim 18 which is curcumin or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for use in the treatment of tuberculosis by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with N- butyldeoxynojirimycin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
20. An inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, for use in the treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential co-administration with a SERCA antagonist.
21. An inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis according to claim 20 which is N- butyldeoxynojirimycin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for use in the treatment of tuberculosis by simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential coadministration with curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
22. A method of treatment of an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium, which method comprises administering to a human or animal patient in need of such treatment an effective amount of a SERCA antagonist and an effective amount of an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis.
23. A method according to claim 22 wherein the infection by a pathogenic
mycobacterium is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
24. A method according to claim 22 or claim 23 wherein the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis are administered to the patient together in the same pharmaceutical composition.
25. A method according to claim 22 or claim 23 wherein the SERCA antagonist and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis are administered to the patient in different pharmaceutical compositions.
26. A method according to claim 25, wherein the different pharmaceutical
compositions are administered separately, simultaneously, concomitantly or sequentially.
27. A method according to any one of claims 22 to 26 wherein the patient is human.
28. A kit of parts comprising a SERCA antagonist together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
29. A kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis together with instructions for simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use in combination with a SERCA antagonist, for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
30. A kit of parts comprising an inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis, a SERCA antagonist, and instructions for their simultaneous, concurrent, separate or sequential use for the treatment of a human or animal patient suffering from or susceptible to an infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium.
31. A kit of parts according to any one of claims 28 to 30 wherein the infection by a pathogenic mycobacterium is an infection caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, the SERCA antagonist is curcumin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and the inhibitor of glycosphingolipid biosynthesis is N-butyldeoxynojirimycin or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
32. A kit of parts according to any one of claims 28 to 31 wherein the patient is human.
PCT/GB2016/050029 2015-01-07 2016-01-07 Treatment of mycobacterial infection Ceased WO2016110702A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/541,809 US20180125796A1 (en) 2015-01-07 2016-01-07 Treatment of mycobacterial infection

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
GB201500207 2015-01-07
GB1500207.4 2015-01-07

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016110702A1 true WO2016110702A1 (en) 2016-07-14

Family

ID=55129991

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/GB2016/050029 Ceased WO2016110702A1 (en) 2015-01-07 2016-01-07 Treatment of mycobacterial infection

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (1) US20180125796A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2016110702A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115957312B (en) * 2023-01-17 2026-03-31 武汉大学 Application of B4GALT1 in the preparation of drugs against Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009141627A1 (en) * 2008-05-22 2009-11-26 Isis Innovation Limited Treating niemann-pick disease type c and related disorders by elevating intracellular calcium

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009141627A1 (en) * 2008-05-22 2009-11-26 Isis Innovation Limited Treating niemann-pick disease type c and related disorders by elevating intracellular calcium

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
LI M Y ET AL: "Curcumin inhibits 19-kDa lipoprotein ofMycobacterium tuberculosisinduced macrophage apoptosis via regulation of the JNK pathway", BIOCHEMICAL AND BIOPHYSICAL RESEARCH COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 446, no. 2, 4 April 2014 (2014-04-04), pages 626 - 632, XP028843435, ISSN: 0006-291X, DOI: 10.1016/J.BBRC.2014.03.023 *
LI MINGYING ET AL: "The protective effect of curcumin against the 19-kDa Mycobacterium tuberculosis protein-induced inflammation and apoptosis in human macrophages", MOLECULAR MEDICINE REPORTS, vol. 10, no. 6, December 2014 (2014-12-01), pages 3261 - 3267, XP002754929 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20180125796A1 (en) 2018-05-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2008269585B2 (en) Substrate reduction therapy
WO2009141627A1 (en) Treating niemann-pick disease type c and related disorders by elevating intracellular calcium
US20100022620A1 (en) Epitope reduction therapy
US20240360171A1 (en) Advanced glycation end product analogues
KR20160094848A (en) Glycolipid inhibition using iminosugars
JP2007509925A (en) Use of deoxynojirimycin derivatives or pharmaceutical salts thereof
EP2766019B1 (en) Anti-inflammatory compounds
MD3989962T2 (en) Combination therapy with acetyl-leucine and miglustat for treating a lysosomal storage disease
WO2016110702A1 (en) Treatment of mycobacterial infection
EP3909568A1 (en) Prophylactic or therapeutic drug for neurodegenerative diseases
EP3595637B1 (en) Combination of active ingredients, compositions comprising it and their use in the treatment of sarcopenia
CN106937952A (en) The preparation of Ezetimibe and Simvastatin
US20200348318A1 (en) Methods for evaluating and improving cognitive function
US20260000703A1 (en) Compounds, compositions, and methods for reducing production of trimethylamine
EP4491186A1 (en) Saikosaponin c as composition for treating or preventing aging vascular diseases including arteriosclerosis
US20210401863A1 (en) Treatment and prevention of neisseria gonorrhoeae infection using cmp-activated nonulosonate analog compounds
EP4511015A1 (en) Bioactive molecules in yogurt
EP4518832A1 (en) Chondroitin- and collagen peptide-based methods for slowing down aging and extending lifespan
WO2020226165A1 (en) COMPOSITION FOR INHIBITING α-SYNUCLEIN AGGREGATION AND COMPOSITION FOR INHIBITING SPREADING OF α-SYNUCLEIN AGGREGATES
HK1200704B (en) Anti-inflammatory compounds

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16700508

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 15541809

Country of ref document: US

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16700508

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1